WO2022044972A1 - Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, and display device - Google Patents

Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, and display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022044972A1
WO2022044972A1 PCT/JP2021/030474 JP2021030474W WO2022044972A1 WO 2022044972 A1 WO2022044972 A1 WO 2022044972A1 JP 2021030474 W JP2021030474 W JP 2021030474W WO 2022044972 A1 WO2022044972 A1 WO 2022044972A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
coloring composition
resin
compound
mass
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/030474
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
寛晃 小川
大助 柏木
啓之 山本
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2022544527A priority Critical patent/JPWO2022044972A1/ja
Priority to CN202180048015.3A priority patent/CN115803682A/en
Publication of WO2022044972A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022044972A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a coloring composition. More specifically, the present invention relates to a coloring composition used for forming red pixels of a color filter and the like. The present invention also relates to a cured film, a color filter and a display device using a coloring composition.
  • color filters are generally used for colorizing displayed images.
  • the color filter is manufactured by using a coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator (for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).
  • a color filter When manufacturing a color filter or the like using a coloring composition, a color filter may be manufactured using the coloring composition immediately after production. Therefore, the coloring composition is required to have excellent storage stability.
  • a color filter has pixels of a plurality of colors.
  • Such a color filter having pixels of a plurality of colors is manufactured by sequentially forming a pattern of coloring compositions for forming pixels of each color to form pixels of each color.
  • a color filter may be formed on a member having low heat resistance (for example, an organic semiconductor element such as an organic electroluminescence display element). Since such a member has low heat resistance, it is desirable to form pixels of a color filter in, for example, a low temperature process of 150 ° C. or lower to suppress thermal damage to the support.
  • a member having low heat resistance for example, an organic semiconductor element such as an organic electroluminescence display element. Since such a member has low heat resistance, it is desirable to form pixels of a color filter in, for example, a low temperature process of 150 ° C. or lower to suppress thermal damage to the support.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition, a cured film, a color filter and a display device capable of forming a cured film having excellent storage stability and suppressing color mixing with other colors. be.
  • the present invention provides: ⁇ 1> A coloring composition containing a colorant containing a red colorant, a resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the resin comprises a repeating unit A having at least one cyclic ether group A selected from a group represented by the formula (e-1) and a group represented by the formula (e-2).
  • It comprises a resin EP comprising at least one repeating unit B selected from a repeating unit B-1 having an acid group and a repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group.
  • the coloring composition has a ratio of A max1 / A min1 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the minimum value A min1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm of 25 or more.
  • a coloring composition in which a wavelength having an absorbance of 0.3 exists in the range of 570 to 620 nm when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 500 nm is 1.
  • RE1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond;
  • ring A E1 represents a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and * represents a bond.
  • the resin EP has the content of the cyclic ether group A of 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g, and the content of the acid group and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group.
  • the content of the cyclic ether group A of the resin EP, the content of the acid group, and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group satisfy the condition of the following formula (1). , ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>.
  • RY7 or RY8 and RY9 may be combined to form a ring;
  • Ar Y1 represents an aryl group and RY10 represents an alkyl or aryl group;
  • RY11 represents an alkyl or aryl group.
  • ⁇ 6> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the coloring agent further contains a yellow coloring agent.
  • ⁇ 7> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, wherein the content of the red colorant in the colorant is 70% by mass or more.
  • ⁇ 8> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, which is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process.
  • ⁇ 9> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>, which is for a color filter.
  • ⁇ 10> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9>, which is for a display device.
  • ⁇ 11> A cured film obtained by curing the coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>.
  • ⁇ 12> The color filter having the cured film according to ⁇ 11>.
  • ⁇ 13> A display device having the cured film according to ⁇ 11>.
  • a coloring composition capable of forming a cured film having good storage stability and suppressed color mixing with other colors, a cured film using this coloring composition, a color filter and a display. Equipment can be provided.
  • the notation not describing substitution and non-substitution includes a group having a substituent (atomic group) as well as a group having no substituent (atomic group).
  • the "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the term "exposure” includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp far ultraviolet rays typified by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, active rays such as electron beams, or radiation
  • the numerical range represented by using "-" in the present specification means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • the total solid content means the total mass of all the components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • “(meth) acrylate” represents both acrylate and methacrylate, or either
  • “(meth) acrylic” represents both acrylic and methacrylic, or either.
  • Allyl represents both allyl and / or methacrylic
  • “ (meth) acryloyl ” represents both / or either acryloyl and methacrylic acid.
  • the term "process” is included in this term not only as an independent process but also as long as the intended action of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. ..
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as polystyrene-equivalent values measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is A coloring composition containing a colorant containing a red colorant, a resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the resin has a repeating unit A having at least one cyclic ether group A selected from a group represented by the formula (e-1) and a group represented by the formula (e-2), and a repeating unit having an acid group. It comprises at least one repeating unit B selected from B-1 and a repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protective group, and a resin EP containing.
  • the coloring composition has a ratio of A max1 / A min1 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the minimum value A min1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm of 25 or more.
  • the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 500 nm is 1, the wavelength having an absorbance of 0.3 exists in the range of 570 to 620 nm.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention it is possible to form a cured film having good storage stability and suppressed color mixing with other colors.
  • a low temperature of 150 ° C. or lower preferably 120 ° C. or lower, more preferably 100 ° C. or lower
  • the coloring composition of the present invention it is presumed that a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed can be formed. Further, since the coloring composition has the above-mentioned specific spectral characteristics, it is possible to suppress the reaction of curable components such as resins and polymerizable compounds by external light during storage, and as a result, excellent storage stability is achieved. Presumed to have.
  • the absorbance A ⁇ at a certain wavelength ⁇ is defined by the following equation (Ab1).
  • a ⁇ -log (T ⁇ / 100) ...
  • a ⁇ is the absorbance at the wavelength ⁇ , and T ⁇ is the transmittance (%) of light at the wavelength ⁇ .
  • the absorbance value of the coloring composition may be a value measured in a solution state or a value of a cured film formed by using the coloring composition.
  • a coloring composition is applied onto a glass substrate by a method such as spin coating, dried at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate or the like, and then the light illuminance is 20 mW / cm 2 . It is possible to perform i-line exposure under the condition of an exposure amount of 1 J / cm 2 , and then measure using a film (cured film) obtained by heating on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowing to cool to room temperature. preferable. Absorbance can be measured using a conventionally known spectrophotometer.
  • the ratio A max1 / A min1 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the minimum value A min1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm is 25 or more, and 50. It is preferably 100 or more, and more preferably 100 or more.
  • the higher the value of the ratio A max1 / A min1 the more remarkable the effect of the present invention described above can be obtained, and further, it is easy to obtain a red pixel having excellent color separation from other colors. Therefore, the upper limit of the value of the ratio A max1 / A min1 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 10000 or less, 5000 or less, or 1000 or less.
  • the wavelength having an absorbance of 0.3 is preferably in the range of 570 to 620 nm and preferably in the range of 575 to 615 nm. It is more preferably present in the range of ⁇ 610 nm, and even more preferably in the range of 585 to 605 nm.
  • the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.5 is preferably in the range of 565 to 605 nm, and preferably in the range of 570 to 600 nm. More preferably, it is more preferably present in the range of 575 to 595 nm.
  • the ratio A max1 / A 550 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the absorbance A 550 to light having a wavelength of 550 nm is preferably 2.75 or less. It is more preferably less than or equal to, and even more preferably 1.5 or less.
  • the ratio A max1 / A 600 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the absorbance A 600 to light having a wavelength of 600 nm is preferably 5 to 15. It is more preferably 5 to 13.5, and even more preferably 8 to 12.
  • the ratio A max1 / A 650 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the absorbance A 650 to light having a wavelength of 650 nm is preferably 25 or more, preferably 50 or more. It is more preferably present, and further preferably 100 or more.
  • the colored composition of the present invention has a maximum transmittance of 85% or more for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm in the thickness direction of the film when a cured film having a film thickness of 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m is formed.
  • the average transmittance is preferably 50% or more, the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm in the thickness direction of the film is 90% or more, and the average transmittance is 55% or more. Is more preferable.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably has a transmittance of 1% or less, preferably 0.75% or less, for light having a wavelength of 500 nm when a cured film having a film thickness of 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m is formed. It is more preferably present, and further preferably 0.5% or less. Further, the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is preferably 1% or less, more preferably 0.75% or less, still more preferably 0.5% or less.
  • the solid content concentration of the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 25% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 22.5% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, still more preferably 18% by mass or less.
  • the cured film (pixels) having excellent flatness is excellent even when the cured film (pixels) is formed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower (preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower) throughout the entire process. Pixels) can be formed.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter, and more preferably can be used as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for a display device. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter for a display device, and more preferably as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter for a display device.
  • the type of the display device is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a display device having an organic semiconductor element as a light source such as an organic electroluminescence display device.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can also be used as a coloring composition for a solid-state image sensor. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, and more preferably as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower (preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower) throughout the entire process.
  • the whole step includes, for example, a step of forming a cured film using a colorant composition.
  • forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process is not limited, but all steps of forming a cured film using a coloring composition are performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower. means.
  • the thickness of the cured film and pixels formed by the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 1.1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 1.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the line width (pattern size) of the pixels formed by the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 2.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the upper limit is preferably 7.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 4.0 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2.25 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 2.75 ⁇ m or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent.
  • the colorant include chromatic colorants such as a red colorant, a green colorant, a blue colorant, a yellow colorant, a purple colorant, and an orange colorant.
  • the colorant may be a pigment or a dye.
  • a pigment and a dye may be used in combination.
  • the pigment may be either an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment.
  • an inorganic pigment or a material in which a part of the organic-inorganic pigment is replaced with an organic chromophore can also be used.
  • hue design can be facilitated.
  • a colorant containing a pigment it is easy to form a cured film having excellent durability such as heat resistance and light resistance.
  • a colorant containing a dye it is easy to form a cured film having a higher red color reproduction range.
  • a cured film obtained by using a dye tends to cause color mixing more easily than a cured film obtained by using a pigment, but according to the present invention, when a dye is used as a colorant, Even if it is present, it is possible to form a cured film in which color transfer is suppressed, so that it is particularly effective when a colorant containing a dye is used.
  • the average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, still more preferably 100 nm or less.
  • the average primary particle size of the pigment can be obtained from an image photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle-equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment.
  • the average primary particle size in the present invention is an arithmetic average value of the primary particle size for the primary particles of 400 pigments.
  • the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without aggregation.
  • a pigment multimer can also be used as the colorant.
  • the dye multimer is preferably a dye that is used by dissolving it in a solvent. Further, the dye multimer may form particles. When the dye multimer is a particle, it is usually used in a state of being dispersed in a solvent.
  • the dye multimer in the particle state can be obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization, and the compounds and production methods described in JP-A-2015-214682 are specific examples.
  • the dye multimer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less.
  • the plurality of dye structures contained in one molecule may have the same dye structure or may have different dye structures.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50,000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and even more preferably 6000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, and even more preferably 20,000 or less.
  • Dye multimers are described in JP-A-2011-213925, JP-A-2013-041097, JP-A-2015-028144, JP-A-2015-030742, International Publication No. 2016/031442 and the like. Compounds can also be used.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a red colorant.
  • the red colorant may be a pigment or a dye. Pigments and dyes may be used in combination.
  • the red colorant is preferably a pigment (red pigment) because it is easy to form a film having excellent solvent resistance.
  • the red colorant is preferably at least one selected from a xanthene compound, an anthraquinone compound, a monoazo compound, a diazo compound, an azomethine compound, an aminoketone compound, a quinacridone compound, a perylene compound and a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, and an anthraquinone compound, It is more preferably at least one selected from the quinacridone compound, the perylene compound and the diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, further preferably at least one selected from the anthraquinone compound, the perylene compound and the diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, and the anthraquinone compound.
  • At least one selected from the diketopyrrolopyrrole compound is even more preferred.
  • an anthraquinone compound is particularly preferable because it is a compound having absorption on the longer wave side and the effect of the present invention can be obtained more remarkably.
  • red dye As a red dye, C.I. I. Acid Red 1,4,8,14,17,18,26,27,29,31,34,35,37,42,44,50,51,52,57,66,73,80,87,88, 91,92,94,97,103,111,114,129,133,134,138,143,145,150,151,158,176,183,198,211,215,216,217,249,252 257, 260, 266, 274 and the like can be mentioned.
  • a red colorant As a red colorant, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, and a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in paragraphs 0016 to 0022 of Patent No. 6248838.
  • red colorant a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom bonded to the aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton is used. You can also.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Red 122,177,179,202,254,264,269,272 is preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 177,179,202,254,264,269 is more preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 177,254,264,269 is more preferable, and C.I. I. It is particularly preferable that it is Pigment Red 264.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably further contains a coloring agent other than the red coloring agent.
  • a coloring agent other than the red coloring agent examples include a yellow colorant, a green colorant, a purple colorant, a blue colorant, an orange colorant, and the like, because it is easy to form a cured film having spectral characteristics more suitable for red color. It is preferably a yellow colorant.
  • the yellow colorant is preferably a pigment (yellow pigment) because it is easy to form a film having excellent solvent resistance.
  • yellow colorant examples include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, quinophthalone compounds, isoindolinone compounds, isoindrin compounds, pteridine compounds and anthraquinone compounds, and azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindrin compounds and quinophthalone compounds are preferable.
  • Indoline compounds and azo compounds are more preferred, and isoindolin compounds are particularly preferred.
  • a nickel azobarbituric acid complex (azo compound) having the following structure can also be used.
  • the compounds described in JP-A-2017-201003, the compounds described in JP-A-2017-197719, and paragraph numbers 0011 to 0062 and 0137-0276 of JP-A-2017-171912 are described.
  • X 1 to X 16 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and Z 1 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (QP1) include the compound described in paragraph No. 0016 of Japanese Patent No. 6443711.
  • Y1 to Y3 independently represent halogen atoms.
  • n and m represent integers of 0 to 6, and p represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • (N + m) is 1 or more.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (QP2) include the compounds described in paragraphs 0047 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, 138, 139, 150, 185, 215 is preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139,150 is more preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139 is even more preferable.
  • green colorant examples thereof include green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66.
  • green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66.
  • halogenated zinc phthalocyanine having an average number of halogen atoms in one molecule of 10 to 14, a bromine atom of 8 to 12, and a chlorine atom of 2 to 5 on average. Pigments can also be used. Specific examples include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720.
  • the compound described in Chinese Patent Application No. 1069090227 the phthalocyanine compound having a phosphate ester as a ligand according to International Publication No.
  • phthalocyanine compound and the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2018-180023, the compound described in JP-A-2019-038958, the core-shell type dye described in JP-A-2020-076955, and the like can also be used.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Green 7,36,37,58,59,65 is preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Green 7,36,58,65 is more preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Green 7,36 is more preferable.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15: 1,15: 2,15: 3,15: 4,15: 6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88 etc. Pigments can be mentioned.
  • an aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as the blue colorant. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP2012-247591A and paragraph numbers 0047 of JP2011-157478A.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15,15: 4,15: 6,16,60,64,79 is preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 4,15: 6,16,60,64 is more preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 4, 15: 6 is more preferable.
  • C.I. I. examples thereof include purple pigments such as Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61.
  • the content of the colorant is preferably 5 to 70% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 15% by mass or more, still more preferably 20% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60% by mass or less, more preferably 55% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the content of the red colorant in the colorant is preferably 70% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, and further preferably 90% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content of the red colorant in the colorant is preferably 100% by mass or less, and more preferably 95% by mass or less.
  • the colorant contained in the coloring composition preferably contains a red colorant and a yellow colorant.
  • the content of the yellow colorant is preferably 3 to 45 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the red colorant.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 8 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 15 parts by mass or less.
  • the total content of the red colorant and the yellow colorant in the colorant is preferably 70% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, and further preferably 90% by mass or more. preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition or for the purpose of a binder.
  • a resin mainly used for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition is also referred to as a dispersant.
  • such an application of the resin is an example, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such an application.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention has at least one cyclic ether group A (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific cyclic ether group) selected from a group represented by the formula (e-1) and a group represented by the formula (e-2). ), At least one repeating unit B selected from the repeating unit A having an acid group, the repeating unit B-1 having an acid group, and the repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group, and a resin EP (containing).
  • resin EP containing
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin EP is preferably 2000 to 70000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60,000 or less, and more preferably 50,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3000 or more, and more preferably 5000 or more. If the weight average molecular weight of the resin EP is in the above range, it is easy to achieve both color mixing and storage stability at a higher level.
  • the content of the specific cyclic ether group in the resin EP is preferably 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g. If the content of the specific cyclic ether group in the resin EP is 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g, a cured film that is sufficiently cured can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and the storage stability of the colored composition is also good. Is.
  • the upper limit is preferably 6.3 mmol / g or less, more preferably 6.0 mmol / g or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2.5 mmol / g or more, more preferably 3.0 mmol / g or more, still more preferably 3.2 mmol / g or more, from the viewpoint of film curability. It is particularly preferable that it is 4 mmol / g or more.
  • the total content of the acid group of the resin EP and the content of the group whose acid group is protected by the protecting group is preferably 0.45 to 2.35 mmol / g.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.25 mmol / g or less, more preferably 2.15 mmol / g or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.7 mmol / g or more, and more preferably 0.9 mmol / g or more from the viewpoint of film curability.
  • the resin EP preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group. According to this aspect, it is possible to form a cured film that is sufficiently cured even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is more suppressed. Further, when the unexposed portion is exposed in a pattern using the coloring composition, the unexposed portion can be easily developed and removed with a developing solution, the developability is excellent, and the generation of the residue in the unexposed portion can be further suppressed.
  • the acid group content of the resin EP is preferably 0.45 to 2.35 mmol / g.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.25 mmol / g or less, and more preferably 2.15 mmol / g or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.55 mmol / g or more, and more preferably 0.65 mmol / g or more.
  • the content of the specific cyclic ether group, the content of the acid group, and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by the protecting group preferably satisfy the condition of the following formula (1), and the following formula is preferable. It is more preferable that the condition of (2) is satisfied, and it is further preferable that the condition of the following formula (3) is satisfied.
  • the resin EP contains an acid group content and a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group, respectively, the content of the acid group in the resin EP and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by the protecting group are ,
  • the condition of the following formula (11) is preferable, the condition of the following formula (12) is more preferable, and the condition of the following formula (13) is further preferable.
  • the storage stability of the coloring composition is good, and when the coloring composition is exposed in a pattern, the unexposed portion can be easily developed and removed with a developing solution, and the developability is also excellent. , The generation of residue in the unexposed area can be further suppressed.
  • the resin EP has at least one cyclic ether group (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific cyclic ether group) selected from the group represented by the formula (e-1) and the group represented by the formula (e-2). Includes unit A.
  • the specific cyclic ether group is preferably a group represented by the formula (e-1) because a film having a high crosslink density can be formed.
  • RE1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond;
  • ring A E1 represents a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and * represents a bond.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RE1 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, further preferably 1 to 5, and particularly preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group represented by RE1 is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • RE1 is a hydrogen atom.
  • RE1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the formula (e-1) is a group represented by the following formula (e-1a).
  • the monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by the ring AE1 of the formula (e-2) is preferably a 5- to 7-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered aliphatic ring. It is more preferably a hydrocarbon ring, and even more preferably a 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. Specific examples include a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, and a cycloheptane ring, preferably a cyclopentane ring or a cyclohexane ring, and more preferably a cyclohexane ring. Specific examples of the group represented by the formula (e-2) include the groups shown below.
  • repeating unit A examples include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1).
  • X a1 represents a trivalent linking group
  • La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z a1 represents the above cyclic ether group.
  • Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by Xa1 of the formula (A-1) include a poly (meth) acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine-based linking group, a polyester-based linking group, a polyurethane-based linking group, and a polyurea-based linking group.
  • Examples thereof include polyamide-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polystyrene-based linking groups, bisphenol-based linking groups, novolak-based linking groups, poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polyester-based linking groups, Bisphenol-based linking groups and novolak-based linking groups are preferable, and poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups are more preferable.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by La1 of the formula (A-1) include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), and-. NH-, -SO-, -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S- and groups consisting of a combination of two or more of these can be mentioned.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
  • the content of the repeating unit A is preferably 15 to 95 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP.
  • the upper limit is preferably 85 mol% or less, more preferably 75 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 20 mol% or more, more preferably 30 mol% or more.
  • repeating unit B From the repeating unit B-1 having an acid group (hereinafter, also referred to as repeating unit B-1) and the repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group (hereinafter, also referred to as repeating unit B-2). Includes at least one repeating unit B chosen.
  • the resin EP may contain only one of the repeating unit B-1 and the repeating unit B-2, or may contain the repeating unit B-1 and the repeating unit B-2, respectively.
  • the resin EP preferably contains at least the repeating unit B-1.
  • the resin EP has the repeating unit B-1, it is possible to form a cured film that is sufficiently cured even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is further suppressed. Further, when the unexposed portion is exposed in a pattern using the coloring composition, the unexposed portion can be easily developed and removed with a developing solution, the developability is excellent, and the generation of the residue in the unexposed portion can be further suppressed. Further, when the resin EP contains the repeating unit B-2, it is possible to suppress the progress of the reaction of the specific cyclic ether group of the resin EP during storage of the coloring composition, and the storage stability of the coloring composition can be suppressed. Can be further improved. Further, when the resin EP contains the repeating unit B-1 and the repeating unit B-2, the storage stability of the coloring composition, the developability, and the suppression of the color mixing of the obtained cured film are arranged at a higher level. be able to.
  • Examples of the acid group contained in the repeating unit B-1 and the acid group protected by the protecting group in the repeating unit B-2 include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group.
  • a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
  • Examples of the protecting group that protects the acid group in the repeating unit B-2 include a group that decomposes and is eliminated by the action of an acid or a base.
  • the protecting group is preferably a group represented by any of the formulas (Y1) to (Y5), and is a group represented by the formula (Y3) or the formula (Y5) because it is easy to deprotect. Is more preferable.
  • RY1 to RY3 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY1 to RY3 may be bonded to form a ring;
  • RY4 to RY6 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY4 to RY6 may be bonded to form a ring;
  • RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl.
  • Representing a group or aryl group, RY7 or RY8 and RY9 may be combined to form a ring;
  • Ar Y1 represents an aryl group and RY10 represents an alkyl or aryl group;
  • RY11 represents an alkyl or aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RY1 to RY3 in the formula ( Y1 ) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. In the formula ( Y1 ), two of RY1 to RY3 may be combined to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by the bond of RY1 to RY3 includes a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl.
  • a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a group
  • a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RY4 to RY6 in the formula (Y2) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. It is preferable that at least two of RY4 to RY6 of the formula (Y2) are methyl groups. In the formula (Y2), two of RY4 to RY6 may be combined to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed include the ring described by the formula (Y1).
  • RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl. It represents a group or an aryl group, and RY7 or RY8 may be bonded to RY9 to form a ring.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the ring formed by binding RY7 or RY8 and RY9 include a tetrahydrofuranyl group and a tetrahydropyranyl group.
  • RY7 or RY8 and RY9 are bonded to form a ring.
  • one of RY7 and RY8 is a hydrogen atom.
  • Ar Y1 represents an aryl group
  • RY10 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • Ar Y1 and RY10 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • RY10 is preferably an alkyl group.
  • RY11 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the molecular weight of the protecting group is preferably 40 to 200, more preferably 40 to 150, and even more preferably 40 to 120.
  • a coloring composition having excellent storage stability and excellent curability at a low temperature can be obtained.
  • protective group examples include 1-methoxyethyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-n-propoxyethyl group, 1-n-butoxyethyl group, 1-t-butoxyethyl group and 1-cyclopentyloxyethyl group.
  • repeating unit B-1 examples include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B1). Further, as the repeating unit B-2, a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B2) can be mentioned.
  • X b1 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z b1 represents an acid group.
  • X b2 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z b2 represents a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by X b1 of the formula (B1) and the trivalent linking group represented by X b2 of the formula (B2) are not particularly limited.
  • Examples thereof include a system-based linking group and a novolak-based linking group, and poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polyester-based linking groups, bisphenol-based linking groups and novolac-based linking groups are preferable, and poly (meth) acrylic is preferable.
  • System linking groups are more preferred.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L b1 of the formula (B1) and the divalent linking group represented by L b3 of the formula (B2) include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms) and an arylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms). (Preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S- and two or more of these. Examples are combined groups.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
  • Z b1 in the formula (B1) represents an acid group.
  • the acid group include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
  • Z b2 of the formula (B2) represents a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group.
  • the group in which the acid group is protected by the protecting group include a group in which the acid group is protected by a group represented by any of the above-mentioned formulas (Y1) to (Y5), and the acid group is the formula (Y3). Alternatively, it is preferably a group protected by a group represented by the formula (Y5).
  • the acid group include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
  • R b11 to R b13 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkyl group
  • L b11 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z b11 represents the formula (Z).
  • Y b11 represents a protecting group
  • * represents a portion to be bonded to L b11 .
  • Examples of the halogen atom represented by R b11 to R b13 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R b11 to R b13 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 5.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L b11 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, and -SO-.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
  • Examples of the protecting group represented by Y b11 of the formula (Z-1) and the formula (Z-2) include a group represented by any of the above-mentioned formulas (Y1) to (Y5).
  • Z b11 of the formula (B2-1) is a group represented by the formula (Z-1)
  • Y b11 is the formula (Y5)
  • Z b11 of the formula (B2-1) is a group represented by the formula (Z-2)
  • Y b11 is the formula (Y3).
  • Z b11 of the formula (B2-1) is a group represented by the formula (Z-1)
  • the storage stability of the colored composition can be further improved.
  • Z b11 of the formula (B2-1) is a group represented by the formula (Z-2)
  • a coloring composition having excellent curability at a low temperature can be obtained.
  • the content of the repeating unit B is preferably 5 to 85 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 40 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 8 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more.
  • the content of the unit B-1 in the resin EP is preferably 5 to 85 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 40 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 8 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more.
  • the content of the unit B-2 in the resin EP is preferably 1 to 65 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP.
  • the upper limit is preferably 45 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.
  • the resin EP contains the repeating unit B-1 and the repeating unit B-2, respectively, the resin EP contains 0.4 to 3.2 mol of the repeating unit B-2 for 1 mol of the repeating unit B-1. It is preferably contained, more preferably 0.8 to 2.8 mol, still more preferably 1.2 to 2.4 mol. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition, the developability, and the suppression of the color mixing of the obtained cured film can be made parallel at a higher level.
  • the resin EP may contain a repeating unit containing a hydrocarbon ring group (hereinafter, also referred to as another repeating unit) as a repeating unit other than the repeating unit A and the repeating unit B.
  • the hydrocarbon ring group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group.
  • the hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group or a polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group such as a fused ring or a crosslinked ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group of a fused ring.
  • hydrocarbon ring group examples include a dicyclopentanyl group, an adamantyl group, a tert-butylcyclohexyl group, an isobornyl group and the like.
  • aromatic hydrocarbon ring group examples include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
  • the resin EP preferably contains a repeating unit containing an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group and a repeating unit containing an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group, respectively. According to this aspect, the bulkiness of the side chain makes the resin rigid, the solvent resistance of the cured film is improved, and it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is further suppressed.
  • the content of the repeating unit C is preferably 0.1 to 40 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP.
  • the upper limit is preferably 35 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more.
  • 1 mol of the unit contains 5 to 30 mol of the repeating unit containing an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group, more preferably 8 to 25 mol, and further preferably 10 to 20 mol.
  • the resin becomes rigid, the solvent resistance of the cured film is improved, and it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is further suppressed.
  • the resin EP may contain a repeating unit other than the repeating unit A, the repeating unit B, and the repeating unit C (hereinafter, also referred to as another repeating unit).
  • the content of the other repeating units is preferably 30 mol% or less, more preferably 20 mol% or less, still more preferably 10 mol% or less in all the repeating units of the resin EP.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can further contain a resin other than the above resin EP (hereinafter, also referred to as another resin).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the other resin is preferably 2000 to 2000000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3000 or more, more preferably 4000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more.
  • Examples of other resins include (meth) acrylic resin, (meth) acrylamide resin, en-thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, and polyarylene ether.
  • Examples thereof include phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin and siloxane resin.
  • an epoxy resin other than the resin EP described above can also be used.
  • the other resin is a resin having an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxy group and the like.
  • the resin having an acid group can also be used as an alkali-soluble resin or a dispersant.
  • the acid value of the resin having an acid group is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and particularly preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the resin having an acid group may have a repeating unit derived from a maleimide compound.
  • the maleimide compound include N-alkylmaleimide and N-arylmaleimide.
  • the repeating unit derived from the maleimide compound include a repeating unit represented by the formula (C-mi).
  • Rmi represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Rmi is preferably an aryl group.
  • the other resin is a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimer”). It is also preferable that the resin is contained.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to.
  • paragraph number 0317 of JP2013-209760A can be referred to, and this content is incorporated in the present specification.
  • the other resin is a resin containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the other resin preferably contains a resin containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III).
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15.
  • the alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, further preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (III) include ethylene oxide of paracumylphenol or propylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • the other resin is a dispersant.
  • the dispersant include an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) and a basic dispersant (basic resin).
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is larger than the amount of basic groups.
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) a resin in which the amount of acid groups accounts for 70 mol% or more is preferable, and substantially, when the total amount of the amount of acid groups and the amount of basic groups is 100 mol%.
  • a resin consisting only of an acid group is more preferable.
  • the acid group of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group.
  • the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH / g.
  • the basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is larger than the amount of acid groups.
  • a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol% is preferable when the total amount of the amount of acid groups and the amount of basic groups is 100 mol%.
  • the basic group contained in the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
  • the resin used as the dispersant preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group. Since the resin used as the dispersant contains a repeating unit having an acid group, it is possible to further suppress the generation of development residue when forming a pattern by a photolithography method.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is a graft resin.
  • the description in paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP2012-255128A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is a polyimine-based dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain.
  • the polyimine-based dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group of pKa14 or less, a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and a basic nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain.
  • the resin to have is preferable.
  • the basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a nitrogen atom exhibiting basicity.
  • the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP2012-255128A can be referred to, and the content thereof is incorporated in the present specification.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is a resin having a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core portion.
  • resins include the polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP2013-043962.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and 20 to 70 in all the repeating units of the resin. It is more preferably mol%.
  • polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, and JP-A-2020-06667 As the dispersant, polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, and JP-A-2020-06667.
  • Block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit, block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066688, and the like can also be used.
  • Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include the Disperbyk series manufactured by Big Chemie (for example, Disperbyk-111, 2001, etc.) and the Solsparse series manufactured by Japan Lubrizol Co., Ltd. (for example, Disperserbyk series). For example, Solsparse 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd.'s Ajispar series and the like can be mentioned. Further, the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP2012-137564A and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP2017-194662 can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the resin described in paragraphs 0041 to 0060 of JP-A-2017-206689 and the resin containing the hindered amine quaternary salt described in JP-A-2019-095548 can also be preferably used.
  • the content of the resin is preferably 5 to 50% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the content of the above-mentioned resin EP is preferably 5 to 50% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the content of the above-mentioned resin EP in the resin contained in the coloring composition is preferably 80 to 100% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 97.5% by mass or less, and more preferably 95% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 82.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 85% by mass or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound include compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as a monomer, a prepolymer or an oligomer, but a monomer is preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1500 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 150 or more, and even more preferably 250 or more.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4 mmol / g or more, and further preferably 5 mmol / g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 12 mmol / g or less, more preferably 10 mmol / g or less, and even more preferably 8 mmol / g or less.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 3 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and more preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond. It is more preferable that the compound contains 3 to 6 containing groups. Further, the polymerizable compound is preferably a (meth) acrylate compound having 3 to 15 functionalities, and more preferably a (meth) acrylate compound having 3 to 6 functionalities.
  • polymerizable compound examples include paragraph numbers 0995 to 0108 of JP2009-288705, paragraphs 0227 of JP2013-029760, paragraphs 0254 to 0257 of JP2008-292970, and JP-A. 2013-253224, Paragraph Nos. 0034 to 0038, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-208494, Paragraph Nos. 0477, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-048637, Japanese Patent No. 6057891, Japanese Patent No. 6031807, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-194662. Examples include the compounds described in the publication, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-320; Nihon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • diglycerin EO ethylene oxide modified (meth) acrylate
  • pentaerythritol tetraacrylate manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., NK ester A) -TMMT
  • 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA
  • RP-1040 manufactured by Nihon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Aronix TO-2349 manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.
  • NK Oligo UA-7200 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • light acrylate POB-A0 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane propyleneoxy-modified tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethyleneoxy-modified tri (meth) acrylate, and isocyanuric acid ethyleneoxy-modified tri (meth) acrylate. It is also preferable to use a trifunctional (meth) acrylate compound such as pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate. Commercially available trifunctional (meth) acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306, and M-305.
  • M-303, M-452, M-450 manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.
  • NK ester A9300, A-GLY-9E, A-GLY-20E, A-TMM-3, A-TMM-3L, A -TMM-3LM-N, A-TMPT, TMPT manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • KAYARAD GPO-303, TMPTA, THE-330, TPA-330, PET-30 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) And so on.
  • a polymerizable compound having an acid group can also be used.
  • the polymerizable compound having an acid group By using a polymerizable compound having an acid group, the colored composition in the unexposed portion can be easily removed during development, and the generation of development residue can be suppressed.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group and the like, and a carboxy group is preferable.
  • Examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having an acid group include Aronix M-305, M-510, M-520, and Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • the preferable acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, and more preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the solubility in a developing solution is good, and when the acid value is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling.
  • a polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used.
  • the polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and examples thereof include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120.
  • a polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group can also be used.
  • a polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group and / or a propyleneoxy group is preferable, a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group is more preferable, and 3 to 3 having 4 to 20 ethyleneoxy groups.
  • a hexafunctional (meth) acrylate compound is more preferred.
  • Examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group include KAYARAD RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used.
  • examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., a (meth) acrylate monomer having a fluorene skeleton).
  • the polymerizable compound it is also preferable to use a compound that does not substantially contain an environmentally regulatory substance such as toluene.
  • an environmentally regulatory substance such as toluene.
  • commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT and KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-041708, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-037193, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 02-0322293, and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 02-016765.
  • Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-based skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-049860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-017654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039418 are also suitable.
  • a polymerizable compound having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A No. 01-105238.
  • the polymerizable compounds are UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, Commercially available products such as T-600, AI-600, and LINK-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 5.0 to 35% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • photopolymerization initiator examples include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, and thio compounds. , Ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, hydroxyalkylphenone compounds, aminoalkylphenone compounds and the like.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is a trihalomethyltriazine compound, a benzyldimethylketal compound, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound, an acylphosphine compound, a phosphine oxide compound, a metallocene compound, an oxime compound, or a triarylimidazole dimer.
  • Onium compound benzothiazole compound, benzophenone compound, acetophenone compound, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex, halomethyloxadiazole compound and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compound, preferably oxime compound, hydroxyalkylphenone compound, amino.
  • a compound selected from an alkylphenone compound and an acylphosphine compound is more preferable, and an oxime compound is further preferable.
  • the photopolymerization initiator the compound described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173 and JP-A-6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37-60p, vol. 19, No. 3, 2019 Peroxide-based Photopolymerization Initiator, International Publication No. 2018/221177, Photopolymerization Initiator, International Publication No. 2018/110179, Photopolymerization Initiator, JP-A-2019-043864. Examples thereof include the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-044030, the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-167313, and the contents thereof are described in the present invention. Incorporated in the specification.
  • aminoalkylphenone compound examples include the aminoalkylphenone compound described in JP-A No. 10-291969.
  • Commercially available products of aminoalkylphenone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (above, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgure 369, Ir. BASF) and the like.
  • acylphosphine compound examples include the acylphosphine compound described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898. Specific examples include bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide. Examples of commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (above, manufactured by IGM Resins BV), Irgacure 819, and Irgacure TPO (above, manufactured by BASF).
  • hydroxyalkylphenone compound examples include compounds represented by the following formula (V). Equation (V) In the formula, Rv 1 represents a substituent, Rv 2 and Rv 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and Rv 2 and Rv 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. m represents an integer from 0 to 5.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by Rv 1 include an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) and an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group are preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group and alkoxy group represented by Rv 1 may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and a group having a hydroxyalkylphenone structure.
  • Examples of the group having a hydroxyalkylphenone structure include a benzene ring to which Rv 1 is bonded in the formula (V) or a group having a structure in which one hydrogen atom is removed from Rv 1 .
  • an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable. Further, Rv 2 and Rv 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring (preferably a ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably an aliphatic ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms).
  • the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • hydroxyalkylphenone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (above, IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 1173, Irgar Made) and so on.
  • Examples of the oxime compound include the compound described in JP-A-2001-233842, the compound described in JP-A-2000-080068, the compound described in JP-A-2006-342166, and J. Am. C. S. The compound according to Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660), J. Mol. C. S. The compound described in Perkin II (1979, pp. 156-162), the compound described in Journal of Photopolisr Science and Technology (1995, pp. 202-232), the compound described in JP-A-2000-066385, the compound described in JP-A-2000-066385. Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2017-109766, compounds described in Japanese Patent No.
  • oxime compound examples include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminovtan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, and the like.
  • the oxime compound it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property or a compound having high transparency and hardly discoloring. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARKULS NCI-730, NCI-831, and NCI-930 (all manufactured by ADEKA).
  • an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include the compound described in JP-A-2014-137466, the compound described in Japanese Patent No. 6636081, and the compound described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2016-0109444. Will be.
  • an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of the carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can also be used.
  • Specific examples of such an oxime compound include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/083505.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound containing a fluorine atom is preferably a compound represented by the formula (OX-1).
  • Ar 1 and Ar 2 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, and R 1 is an aryl group having a group containing a fluorine atom.
  • R 2 and R 3 independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group, respectively.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 1 and Ar 2 in the formula (OX-1) may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and particularly preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring.
  • Ar 1 is preferably a benzene ring.
  • Ar 2 is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and more preferably a naphthalene ring.
  • Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a halogen atom, -OR X1 , -SR X1 , -COR X1 , and -COOR X1 . , -OCOR X1 , -NR X1 R X2 , -NHCOR X1 , -CONR X1 R X2 , -NHCONR X1 R X2 , -NHCOOR X1 , -SO 2 R X1 , -SO 2 OR X1 , -NHSO 2 R X1 etc.
  • RX1 and RX2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group as a substituent and the alkyl group represented by RX1 and RX2 is preferably 1 to 30.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred.
  • the alkyl group may be partially or wholly substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom).
  • a part or all of hydrogen atoms may be substituted with the above-mentioned substituent.
  • the aryl group as a substituent and the aryl group represented by RX1 and RX2 preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. Further, the aryl group may have a part or all of hydrogen atoms substituted with the above-mentioned substituents.
  • the heterocyclic group as a substituent and the heterocyclic group represented by RX1 and RX2 are preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and even more preferably 3 to 12.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. Further, in the heterocyclic group, a part or all of hydrogen atoms may be substituted with the above-mentioned substituent.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 1 is preferably an unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 2 preferably has a substituent.
  • -COR X1 is preferable.
  • RX1 is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, more preferably an aryl group.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 of the formula (OX-1) represents an aryl group having a group containing a fluorine atom.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the group containing a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom (hereinafter, also referred to as a fluorine-containing alkyl group) and a group containing an alkyl group having a fluorine atom (hereinafter, also referred to as a fluorine-containing group).
  • the fluorine-containing groups include -OR F1 , -SR F1 , -COR F1 , -COOR F1 , -OCOR F1 , -NR F1 R F2 , -NHCOR F1 , -CONR F1 R F2 , -NHCONR F1 R F2 , and -NHCOOR. At least one group selected from F1 , -SO 2 R F1 , -SO 2 OR F1 and -NHSO 2 R F1 is preferred.
  • RF1 represents a fluorine-containing alkyl group
  • RF2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a fluorine-containing alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • the fluorine-containing group is preferably -OR F1 .
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group represented by RF1 and RF2 and the alkyl group represented by RF2 preferably have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, further preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. ..
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group and the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferable.
  • the substitution rate of the fluorine atom is preferably 40 to 100%, more preferably 50 to 100%, still more preferably 60 to 100%.
  • the substitution rate of fluorine atoms means the ratio (%) of the number of substitutions to fluorine atoms to the number of total hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group.
  • the aryl group represented by RF2 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocyclic group represented by RF2 is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • the number of condensations is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 6, further preferably 3 to 5, and particularly preferably 3 to 4.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 40, more preferably 3 to 30, and even more preferably 3 to 20.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the hetero ring group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and more preferably a nitrogen atom.
  • the group containing a fluorine atom preferably has a terminal structure represented by the formula (1) or (2).
  • * In the formula represents a connecting hand. * -CHF 2 (1) * -CF 3 (2)
  • R 2 of the formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group and the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the above-mentioned substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 15, further preferably 1 to 10, and particularly preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 3 of the formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group and the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the above-mentioned substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R 3 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 15, and even more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred.
  • the aryl group represented by R 3 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • oxime compound having a fluorine atom examples include compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36-40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471.
  • Compound (C-3) and the like can be mentioned.
  • an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include the compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A and paragraphs 0008-0012 and 0070-0079 of JP-A-2014-137466. Examples thereof include the compound described in paragraphs 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071, ADEKA ARKULS NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA).
  • an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used.
  • Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in International Publication No. 2015/036910.
  • an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxy group is bonded to the carbazole skeleton can also be used.
  • Examples of such a photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055.
  • the photopolymerization initiator A1 having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more in methanol and the extinction coefficient of 365 nm in methanol are 1. It is preferable to use in combination with the photopolymerization initiator A2 having an extinction coefficient of 0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / g cm or less and a wavelength of 254 nm of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more.
  • the coloring composition is easily cured sufficiently by exposure, has good flatness in a low temperature process (for example, a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower, preferably a temperature of 120 ° C.
  • the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2 it is preferable to select and use a compound having the above-mentioned extinction coefficient from the above-mentioned compounds.
  • the absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator at the above wavelength is a value measured as follows. That is, it was calculated by dissolving the photopolymerization initiator in methanol to prepare a measurement solution and measuring the absorbance of the above-mentioned measurement solution. Specifically, the above-mentioned measurement solution was placed in a glass cell having a width of 1 cm, and the absorbance was measured using a UV-Vis-NIR spectrum meter (Cary5000) manufactured by Agilent Technologies. The absorbance coefficient (mL / gcm) at 254 nm was calculated. In the above formula, ⁇ represents the extinction coefficient (mL / gcm), A represents the absorbance, c represents the concentration of the photopolymerization initiator (g / mL), and l represents the optical path length (cm).
  • the absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator A1 in methanol at a wavelength of 365 nm is 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more, preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / g cm or more, preferably 1.1 ⁇ . It is more preferably 10 4 mL / g cm or more, further preferably 1.2 ⁇ 10 4 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / g cm, and 1.3 ⁇ 10 4 to 5.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL. It is even more preferably / gcm, and particularly preferably 1.5 ⁇ 10 4 to 3.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm.
  • the absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator A1 in methanol at a wavelength of 254 nm is preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 4 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / g cm, preferably 1.5 ⁇ 10 4 to. It is more preferably 9.5 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm, and even more preferably 3.0 ⁇ 10 4 to 8.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm.
  • an oxime compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, an oxime compound and an acylphosphine compound are more preferable, an oxime compound is further preferable, and compatibility with other components contained in the composition. From the viewpoint of the above, it is particularly preferable that the oxime compound contains a fluorine atom.
  • Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator A1 include 1,2-octanedione, 1- [4- (phenylthio)-, 2- (O-benzoyloxime)] (commercially available products include, for example, Irgure OXE01, BASF).
  • the extinction coefficient of the light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm or less, preferably 10 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm, 20 More preferably, it is ⁇ 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / g cm.
  • the difference between the absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 9.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL.
  • the absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator A2 in methanol at a wavelength of 254 nm is 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / gcm or more, and 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 6 mL / gcm. It is preferably 5.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / g cm.
  • a hydroxyalkylphenone compound, a phenylglioxylate compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound and a phenylglycilate compound are more preferable, and a hydroxyalkylphenone compound is further preferable.
  • the hydroxyalkylphenone compound the compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (V) is preferable.
  • photopolymerization initiator A2 examples include 1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone (commercially available products include, for example, Omnirad 184 (IGM Resins BV), Irgure 184 (BASF)). 1- [4- (2-Hydroxyethoxy) -phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-propane-1-one (As a commercial product, for example, Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins BV). , Irgacure 2959 (manufactured by BASF) and the like.
  • the photopolymerization initiator A1 As a combination of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2, a combination in which the photopolymerization initiator A1 is an oxime compound and the photopolymerization initiator A2 is a hydroxyalkylphenone compound is preferable, and the photopolymerization initiator A1 is A combination of an oxime compound in which the photopolymerization initiator A2 is a compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (V) is more preferable, the photopolymerization initiator A1 is an oxime compound containing a fluorine atom, and the photopolymerization initiator A2 is A combination of the compounds represented by the above formula (V) is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 17.5% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 1.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 15.0% by mass or less, more preferably 12.5% by mass or less, and further preferably 10.0% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains 1.0 to 50 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 30 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2.5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 5.0 parts by mass or more. According to this aspect, the pattern shape after development is good.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator A1 is 0.1 to 17.5 in the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably by mass%.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 1.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 15.0% by mass or less, more preferably 12.5% by mass or less, and further preferably 10.0% by mass or less.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 0.1 to 10.0 in the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably by mass%.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 1.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 9.0% by mass or less, more preferably 8.0% by mass or less, and further preferably 7.0% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention comprises 100 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator A1.
  • the upper limit is preferably 175 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 150 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 60 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 70 parts by mass or more.
  • a cured film having excellent properties such as solvent resistance can be formed in a low temperature process (for example, a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower, preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process).
  • the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition are used.
  • the total content with the agent A2 is preferably 0.1 to 20.0% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1.0% by mass or more, more preferably 2.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 2.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 17.5% by mass or less, more preferably 15.0% by mass or less, and further preferably 12.5% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a compound containing a frill group (hereinafter, also referred to as a frill group-containing compound). According to this aspect, a coloring composition excellent in low temperature curing can be obtained.
  • the structure of the frill group-containing compound is not particularly limited as long as it contains a frill group (a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from furan).
  • a frill group a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from furan.
  • the compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0089 of JP-A-2017-194662 can be used.
  • the frill group-containing compound may be a monomer or a polymer.
  • a polymer is preferable because it is easy to improve the durability of the obtained film.
  • the weight average molecular weight is preferably 2000 to 70000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3000 or more, more preferably 4000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more.
  • the polymer-type frill group-containing compound is also a component corresponding to the resin in the coloring composition of the present invention.
  • the content of the frill group-containing compound is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2.5% by mass or more, more preferably 5.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 7.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the frill group-containing compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, the total amount is preferably in the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
  • the solvent include organic solvents.
  • the solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the coloring composition.
  • the organic solvent include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, hydrocarbon-based solvents and the like. For these details, paragraph 0223 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Further, an ester solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and a ketone solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvent examples include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -Heptanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethylcarbitol acetate, butylcarbi Tall acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N, N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N, N-di
  • aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may need to be reduced for environmental reasons (for example, 50 parts by mass (parts) with respect to the total amount of organic solvent. Per millision) or less, 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
  • the solvent is preferably an organic solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or lower.
  • the boiling point of the organic solvent is more preferably 140 ° C. or lower, further preferably 130 ° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit of the boiling point is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 ° C. or higher, for example.
  • Examples of such an organic solvent include butyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, cyclohexanone, ethyl lactate and the like, and butyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate are preferable.
  • a solvent having a low metal content it is preferable to use a solvent having a low metal content, and the metal content of the solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per parts) or less. If necessary, a solvent at the mass ppt (parts per trillion) level may be used, and such a high-purity solvent is provided by, for example, Toyo Synthetic Co., Ltd. (The Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).
  • Examples of the method for removing impurities such as metals from the solvent include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter pore diameter of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
  • the solvent may contain isomers (compounds having the same number of atoms but different structures). Further, only one kind of isomer may be contained, or a plurality of kinds may be contained.
  • the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
  • the content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 60 to 95% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 87.5% by mass or less, and further preferably 85% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 65% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and further preferably 75% by mass or more.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention does not substantially contain an environmentally regulated substance from the viewpoint of environmental regulations.
  • substantially free of the environmentally regulated substance means that the content of the environmentally regulated substance in the coloring composition is 50 mass ppm or less, and preferably 30 mass ppm or less. It is more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less.
  • the environmentally regulated substance include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene.
  • REACH Registration Evolution Analysis and Restriction of Chemicals
  • PRTR Policy Release and Transfer Register
  • VOC Volatile and Transfer Registor
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • a method for reducing the environmentally regulated substance there is a method of heating or depressurizing the inside of the system to raise the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substance or higher and distilling off the environmentally regulated substance from the system to reduce the amount. Further, when distilling off a small amount of an environmentally regulated substance, it is also useful to azeotrope with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the solvent in order to improve efficiency.
  • a polymerization inhibitor or the like is added and the mixture is distilled off under reduced pressure in order to prevent the radical polymerization reaction from proceeding and cross-linking between molecules during distillation under reduced pressure. May be.
  • distillation methods are either a raw material step, a product obtained by reacting the raw materials (for example, a resin solution after polymerization or a polyfunctional monomer solution), or a colored composition step prepared by mixing these compounds. It is also possible at the stage of.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a pigment derivative.
  • the pigment derivative include compounds having a structure in which a part of the chromophore is replaced with an acid group, a basic group or a phthalimide methyl group.
  • the chromogens constituting the pigment derivative include quinoline skeleton, benzoimidazolone skeleton, diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton, azo skeleton, phthalocyanine skeleton, anthracinone skeleton, quinacridone skeleton, dioxazine skeleton, perinone skeleton, perylene skeleton, thioindigo skeleton, and iso.
  • Examples thereof include indolin skeleton, isoindolinone skeleton, quinophthalone skeleton, slene skeleton, metal complex skeleton, etc. , Azo skeleton and benzoimidazolone skeleton are more preferred.
  • As the acid group of the pigment derivative a sulfo group and a carboxy group are preferable, and a sulfo group is more preferable.
  • As the basic group of the pigment derivative an amino group is preferable, and a tertiary amino group is more preferable.
  • pigment derivative examples include Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 56-118462, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 63-264674, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 01-217077, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-009961, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-026767.
  • JP-A-2015-172732 In JP-A-2014-199308, JP-A-2014-085562, JP-A-2014-035351, JP-A-2008-081565, JP-A-2019-109512, JP-A-2019-133154 The described compounds are mentioned.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • the lower limit of this range is more preferably 0.25 parts by mass or more, further preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 0.75 parts by mass or more, and 1 part by mass or more. It is more preferable to have.
  • the upper limit of this range is more preferably 25 parts by mass or less, further preferably 20 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 15 parts by mass or less.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is within the above range, there is an effect that the stability with time is further improved.
  • the pigment derivative only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • a curing accelerator may be added for the purpose of accelerating the reaction of the polymerizable compound or lowering the curing temperature.
  • the curing accelerator include polyfunctional thiol compounds having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol compound, and more preferably a compound represented by the formula (T1). Equation (T1)
  • n represents an integer of 2 to 4
  • L represents a linking group of 2 to 4 valences.
  • the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the curing accelerator is a methylol-based compound (for example, a compound exemplified as a cross-linking agent in paragraph No. 0246 of JP-A-2015-034963), amines, phosphonium salt, amidin salt, amide compound (for example, above, for example.
  • an alkoxysilane compound for example, an alkoxysilane compound having an epoxy group described in JP-A-2011-253504
  • an onium salt compound eg, JP-A-2015-034963
  • a compound exemplified as an acid generator in paragraph No. 0216, a compound described in JP-A-2009-180949) and the like can also be used.
  • the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. More preferably by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent.
  • a silane coupling agent a silane compound having at least two kinds of functional groups having different reactivity in one molecule is preferable.
  • the silane coupling agent includes at least one group selected from a vinyl group, an epoxy group, a styrene group, a methacrylic group, an amino group, an isocyanurate group, a ureido group, a mercapto group, a sulfide group, and an isocyanate group, and an alkoxy group.
  • a silane compound having a above is preferable.
  • silane coupling agent examples include N-2- (aminoethyl) -3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (KBM-602, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-2- (aminoethyl) -3.
  • the description in paragraphs 0155 to 0158 of JP2013-254047A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.001 to 20% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. Is more preferable, and 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of silane coupling agent, or may contain two or more kinds of silane coupling agents. When two or more kinds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), and the like. Examples thereof include 2,2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, first cerium salt, etc.).
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types of the polymerization inhibitor. When two or more kinds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • an ultraviolet absorber a conjugated diene compound, an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a hydroxyphenyltriazine compound, an indole compound, a triazine compound and the like can be used.
  • paragraph numbers 0052 to 0072 of JP2012-208374A paragraph numbers 0317 to 0334 of JP2013-066814, and paragraph numbers 0061 to 0080 of JP2016-162946. It can be taken into consideration and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Examples of commercially available ultraviolet absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Kagaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of the benzotriazole compound include the MYUA series made of Miyoshi Oil & Fat (The Chemical Daily, February 1, 2016).
  • the ultraviolet absorber the compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967 can also be used.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains an ultraviolet absorber, the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferable, and 0.1 to 3% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the ultraviolet absorber only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the surfactant described in paragraph Nos. 0238 to 0245 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 is mentioned, and the content thereof is incorporated in the present specification.
  • the surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based surfactant.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant in the coloring composition, the liquid characteristics (particularly, fluidity) can be further improved, and the liquid saving property can be further improved. It is also possible to form a film having a small thickness unevenness.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity in the thickness of the coating film and liquid saving, and has good solubility in a coloring composition.
  • fluorine-based surfactant examples include the surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-041318 (paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of International Publication No. 2014/017669) and the like, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-.
  • the surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 132503 and the surfactants described in JP-A-2020-008634 are mentioned, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • fluorine-based surfactants include, for example, Megafax F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144. , F-437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which a portion of the functional group containing a fluorine atom is cut off and the fluorine atom volatilizes when heat is applied.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant include the Megafuck DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Megafuck. DS-21 can be mentioned.
  • fluorine-based surfactant it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant include the fluorine-based surfactants described in JP-A-2016-216602, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant a block polymer can also be used.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meth).
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A-2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compounds is preferably 3000 to 50,000, for example 14000.
  • % indicating the ratio of the repeating unit is mol%.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain can also be used. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295 of JP2010-164965, Megafuck RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, manufactured by DIC Corporation. RS-72-K and the like can be mentioned. Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, the compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2015-117327 can also be used.
  • a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by the formula (fi-1) is also preferable to use as a surfactant.
  • m represents 1 or 2
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4
  • represents 1 or 2
  • X ⁇ + represents an ⁇ -valent metal ion, a primary ammonium ion, and a first.
  • Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ethers, polyoxyethylene stearyl ethers, etc.
  • silicone-based surfactant examples include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torre Silicone SH21PA, Torre Silicone SH28PA, Torre Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400 (all, Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.).
  • TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials
  • KP-341, KF-6001, KF-6002 above, Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 all manufactured by Big Chemie
  • FZ-2122 Dow Toray Co., Ltd.
  • a compound having the following structure can also be used as the silicone-based surfactant.
  • the content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 3.0% by mass.
  • the surfactant may be only one kind or two or more kinds. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • additives such as fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, antiaggregating agents and the like can be added to the coloring composition of the present invention, if necessary.
  • additives include the additives described in paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A-2004-295116, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the antioxidant for example, a phenol compound, a phosphorus-based compound (for example, the compound described in paragraph No. 0042 of JP-A-2011-090147), a thioether compound and the like can be used.
  • ADEKA's ADEKA stub series examples include ADEKA's ADEKA stub series (AO-20, AO-30, AO-40, AO-50, AO-50F, AO-60, AO-60G, AO-80, AO-330, etc.
  • the antioxidant the polyfunctional hindered amine antioxidant described in International Publication No. 2017/006600, the antioxidant described in International Publication No. 2017/1604024, paragraph Nos. 0023 to Patent No. 6268967.
  • the antioxidant described in 0048 can also be used. Only one kind of antioxidant may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a latent antioxidant, if necessary.
  • the latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site that functions as an antioxidant is protected by a protecting group, and is heated at 100 to 250 ° C. or at 80 to 200 ° C. in the presence of an acid / base catalyst. This includes compounds in which the protecting group is desorbed and functions as an antioxidant. Specific examples of the latent antioxidant include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARKULS GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA).
  • the coloring composition of the present invention includes a sensitizer and a photostabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A-2004-295116, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 1981 of JP-A-2004-091940, and JP-A-2018-091940.
  • the storage stabilizer described in paragraph No. 0242 of the publication can be contained.
  • the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt may be restricted.
  • the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid particularly the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group
  • a salt thereof and a par
  • the content of the fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (particularly the perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salt is 0.01 ppb to 1,000 ppb with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and salts thereof, as well as perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and salts thereof.
  • perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt by using a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt, perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid can be used.
  • a coloring composition that is substantially free of salts thereof may be selected.
  • Examples of compounds that can substitute for the regulated compound include compounds excluded from the regulation due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkyl group. However, the above-mentioned contents do not prevent the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and a salt thereof, and a perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and a salt thereof within the maximum allowable range.
  • the container for containing the coloring composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known container can be used.
  • a storage container for the purpose of suppressing impurities from being mixed into raw materials and coloring compositions, a multi-layer bottle having a container inner wall made of 6 types and 6 layers of resin and a bottle having 6 types of resin having a 7-layer structure. It is also preferable to use. Examples of such a container include the container described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-123351.
  • the inner wall of the container is preferably made of glass or stainless steel for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, improving the storage stability of the composition, and suppressing the deterioration of the components.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be produced by mixing the above-mentioned components.
  • all the components may be simultaneously dissolved and / or dispersed in a solvent to produce the coloring composition, or each component may be appropriately used as two or more solutions or dispersions, if necessary. Then, these may be mixed at the time of use (at the time of application) to produce a colored composition.
  • the process of dispersing the pigment may be included in the production of the coloring composition.
  • the mechanical force used for dispersing the pigment includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation and the like. Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion and the like.
  • the process and disperser for dispersing pigments are "Dispersion Technology Complete Works, Published by Information Organization Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005" and "Dispersion technology centered on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system) and industrial”. Practical application The process and disperser described in Paragraph No.
  • JP-A-2015-157893 "Comprehensive Data Collection, Published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978" can be preferably used.
  • the particles may be miniaturized in the salt milling step.
  • the materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling step for example, the descriptions in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629 can be referred to.
  • any filter that has been conventionally used for filtration or the like can be used without particular limitation.
  • fluororesins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyamide resins such as nylon (eg, nylon-6, nylon-6,6), and polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP).
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
  • nylon eg, nylon-6, nylon-6,6)
  • polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP).
  • filters using materials such as (including high-density, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene resin).
  • polypropylene (including high-density polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
  • the pore diameter of the filter is preferably 0.01 to 7.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m. If the pore diameter of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably.
  • the nominal value of the filter manufacturer can be referred to.
  • various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NIEY, DFA4201NAEY, DFA4201J006P, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nippon Microlith Co., Ltd.), Kitts Microfilter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used. ..
  • a fiber-like filter medium As the filter.
  • the fiber-like filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber and the like.
  • examples of commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008, etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005, etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003, etc.) manufactured by Roki Techno Co., Ltd.
  • filters different filters (eg, first filter and second filter, etc.) may be combined. At that time, the filtration with each filter may be performed only once or twice or more. Further, filters having different pore diameters may be combined within the above-mentioned range. Further, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after mixing the other components, the filtration may be performed with the second filter.
  • the cured film of the present invention is a film obtained by curing the above-mentioned coloring composition of the present invention.
  • the cured film of the present invention can be used for a color filter or the like. Specifically, it can be preferably used as a colored layer (pixel) of a color filter, and more preferably used as a red pixel.
  • the film thickness of the cured film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted depending on the intended purpose, but is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 1.1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 1.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the method for forming the cured film includes a step of applying the coloring composition of the present invention on a support to form a coloring composition layer, a step of exposing the coloring composition layer (exposure step), and coloring after exposure. It is preferable to include a step of heat-treating the composition layer (post-baking step). Further, when forming a patterned cured film (pixels), the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern in the above exposure step, and the colored composition layer after exposure is formed between the exposure step and the post-baking step. It is preferable to further include a step of developing (development step).
  • the present invention it is preferable to carry out at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process.
  • "performing at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process” means that all the steps of forming a cured film using the coloring composition are performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower.
  • this heating step is also performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is applied onto the support to form the coloring composition layer.
  • the support include a glass substrate and a resin substrate.
  • the resin substrate include a polycarbonate substrate, a polyester substrate, an aromatic polyamide substrate, a polyamide-imide substrate, a polyimide substrate and the like.
  • An organic light emitting layer may be formed on these substrates.
  • a silicon substrate can also be used as the support.
  • a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, or the like may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • the support may be provided with a base layer for improving the adhesion with the upper layer, preventing the diffusion of substances, or flattening the surface of the substrate.
  • the surface contact angle of the base layer is preferably 20 to 70 ° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80 ° when measured with water. When the surface contact angle of the base layer is within the above range, the coating property of the coloring composition is good.
  • the surface contact angle of the base layer can be adjusted by, for example, adding a surfactant.
  • the underlayer may be formed by using a composition obtained by removing the coloring agent from the coloring composition described in the present specification, a composition containing the resin, the polymerizable compound, the surfactant and the like described in the present specification, and the like. good.
  • a known method can be used as a method for applying the coloring composition.
  • a drop method drop cast
  • a slit coat method for example, a spray method; a roll coat method; a rotary coating method (spin coating); a cast coating method; a slit and spin method; a pre-wet method (for example, JP-A-2009-145395).
  • Methods described in the publication Inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing method, etc.
  • Various printing methods; transfer method using a mold or the like; nanoinprint method and the like can be mentioned.
  • the method of application in inkjet is not particularly limited, and is, for example, the method shown in "Expandable / usable inkjet-infinite possibilities seen in patents-, published in February 2005, Sumi Betechno Research" (especially from page 115). Page 133), JP-A-2003-262716, JP-A-2003-185831, JP-A-2003-261827, JP-A-2012-126830, JP-A-2006-169325, and the like. Can be mentioned. Further, regarding the method of applying the coloring composition, the description of International Publication No. 2017/030174 and International Publication No. 2017/018419 can be referred to, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked).
  • the prebake temperature is preferably 80 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or lower, further preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 50 ° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 40 ° C. or higher.
  • the prebake time is preferably 10 to 3600 seconds. Pre-baking can be performed on a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
  • the coloring composition layer is exposed (exposure step).
  • the coloring composition layer can be subjected to a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like.
  • the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern.
  • the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern. As a result, the exposed portion can be cured.
  • Examples of the light that can be used for exposure include ultraviolet rays such as g-line (wavelength 436 nm) and i-line (wavelength 365 nm).
  • the exposure using the i-line may be performed while cutting light having a wavelength shorter than that of the i-line, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10201701122130.
  • light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less preferably light having a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm
  • Examples of the light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF line (wavelength 248 nm), ArF line (wavelength 193 nm) and the like, and KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) is preferable.
  • a long wave light source having a diameter of 300 nm or more can also be used.
  • pulse exposure is an exposure method of a method in which light irradiation and pause are repeated in a cycle of a short time (for example, a millisecond level or less).
  • the irradiation amount is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J / cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J / cm 2 .
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected, and in addition to the operation in the atmosphere, for example, in a low oxygen atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, or substantially). It may be exposed in an oxygen-free environment), or may be exposed in a high oxygen atmosphere (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume) in which the oxygen concentration exceeds 21% by volume.
  • the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and is usually selected from the range of 1000 W / m 2 to 100,000 W / m 2 (for example, 5000 W / m 2 , 15,000 W / m 2 , or 35,000 W / m 2 ). Can be done.
  • the oxygen concentration and the exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined with each other, and for example, the illuminance may be 10,000 W / m 2 when the oxygen concentration is 10% by volume, the illuminance may be 20000 W / m 2 when the oxygen concentration is 35% by volume, and the like.
  • the method for forming the cured film it is also preferable to develop the colored composition layer after exposure.
  • the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer is developed and removed by developing the exposed colored composition layer to pattern the cured film. It can be formed into a shape to form a pixel.
  • the development and removal of the unexposed portion of the coloring composition layer can be performed using a developing solution.
  • the colored composition layer of the unexposed portion in the exposure step is eluted in the developing solution, and only the photocured portion remains.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably, for example, 20 to 30 ° C.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the steps of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
  • Examples of the developing solution include organic solvents and alkaline developing solutions, and alkaline developing solutions are preferable.
  • the alkaline developer an alkaline aqueous solution (alkaline developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water is preferable.
  • the alkaline agent include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxyamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide.
  • Ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide Ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene, etc.
  • examples thereof include organic alkaline compounds and inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate.
  • the alkaline agent a compound having a large molecular weight is preferable in terms of environment and safety.
  • the concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
  • the developer may further contain a surfactant.
  • the surfactant include the above-mentioned surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable.
  • the developer may be once produced as a concentrated solution and diluted to a concentration required for use.
  • the dilution ratio is not particularly limited, but can be set in the range of, for example, 1.5 to 100 times. It is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after development.
  • the rinsing is performed by supplying the rinsing liquid to the developed colored composition layer while rotating the support on which the developed colored composition layer is formed. It is also preferable to move the nozzle for discharging the rinse liquid from the central portion of the support to the peripheral edge of the support. At this time, when moving the nozzle from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion, the nozzle may be moved while gradually reducing the moving speed. By rinsing in this way, in-plane variation of the rinse can be suppressed. Further, the same effect can be obtained by gradually reducing the rotation speed of the support while moving the nozzle from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion.
  • Additional exposure processing and post-baking are post-development curing treatments to complete the curing.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 150 ° C or lower.
  • the upper limit of the heating temperature is more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, further preferably 100 ° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit of the heating temperature is not particularly limited as long as it can promote the curing of the composition, but is more preferably 50 ° C. or higher, further preferably 75 ° C. or higher.
  • the heating time is preferably 1 minute or longer, more preferably 5 minutes or longer, and even more preferably 10 minutes or longer.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but 20 minutes or less is preferable from the viewpoint of productivity.
  • Post-baking is also preferably carried out in an atmosphere of an inert gas.
  • thermal polymerization can proceed with very high efficiency without being hindered by oxygen, and even when pixels are manufactured at a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process, flatness is achieved. It is possible to manufacture pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance.
  • the inert gas include nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas and the like, and nitrogen gas is preferable.
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of post-baking is preferably 100 ppm or less.
  • the step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern involves light having a wavelength of more than 350 nm and 380 nm or less (preferably having a wavelength of 355 to 370 nm) with respect to the colored composition layer.
  • the exposure is performed by irradiating with light, more preferably i-line), and the additional exposure treatment (exposure after development) is performed with respect to the developed colored composition layer with light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm (preferably a wavelength of 254 nm). It is preferable to irradiate and expose the light.
  • the coloring composition layer can be appropriately cured by the first exposure (exposure before development), and the entire coloring composition layer is cured almost completely by the next exposure (exposure after development).
  • the colored composition layer can be sufficiently cured even under low temperature conditions to form pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance, adhesion, and rectangularity of the pattern.
  • the coloring composition contains, as a photopolymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more in a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol.
  • Exposure after development can be performed using, for example, an ultraviolet photoresist curing device.
  • the ultraviolet photoresist curing apparatus may irradiate light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm and other light (for example, i-line).
  • the exposure amount (irradiation amount) in the exposure after development is preferably 30 to 4000 mJ / cm 2 , more preferably 50 to 3500 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the difference between the wavelength of the light used in the exposure before development and the wavelength of the light used in the exposure after development is preferably 200 nm or less, and more preferably 100 to 150 nm.
  • the color filter of the present invention has the above-mentioned cured film of the present invention.
  • the cured film of the present invention is preferably provided as a colored pixel of a color filter, more preferably as a red pixel.
  • the color filter of the present invention has colored pixels of other hues in addition to the pixels of the cured film of the present invention.
  • the colored pixels of other hues include blue pixels, green pixels, yellow pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and the like.
  • a preferred embodiment of the color filter of the present invention includes an embodiment having a red pixel, a green pixel, and a blue pixel composed of the cured film of the present invention.
  • the coloring composition for forming green pixels which is preferably used in combination with the pixels of the cured film of the present invention, has a maximum absorbance A max11 for light having a wavelength of 400 to 450 nm and a minimum absorbance A for light having a wavelength 475 to 575 nm.
  • the ratio A max11 / A min11 with min12 is preferably 15 or more, more preferably 20 or more, and further preferably 25 or more.
  • the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.3 is preferably in the range of 455 to 505 nm, preferably 460 to 500 nm. It is more preferably present in the range, further preferably in the range of 465 to 495 nm, and particularly preferably in the range of 470 to 490 nm.
  • the coloring composition for forming blue pixels which is preferably used in combination with the pixels of the cured film of the present invention, has a maximum absorbance A max21 for light having a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm and a minimum absorbance Amin21 for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm.
  • the ratio of A max21 / A min21 to and A max21 / A min21 is preferably 10 or more, more preferably 12.5 or more, and further preferably 15 or more.
  • the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.3 is preferably in the range of 475 to 555 nm, preferably 480 to 540 nm. It is more preferably present in the range, more preferably in the range of 485 to 525 nm, and particularly preferably in the range of 490 to 510 nm.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used for a display device, a solid-state image pickup device such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) or CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor).
  • a solid-state image pickup device such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) or CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor).
  • the film thickness of the cured film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted depending on the intended purpose, but is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 1.1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 1.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the line width (pattern size) of the pixels is preferably 2.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the upper limit is preferably 7.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 4.0 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2.25 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 2.75 ⁇ m or more.
  • the color filter of the present invention may be provided with a protective layer on the surface of the cured film of the present invention.
  • a protective layer By providing the protective layer, various functions such as oxygen blocking, low reflection, prohydrophobicization, and shielding of light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.) can be imparted.
  • the thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • Examples of the method for forming the protective layer include a method of applying a resin composition dissolved in an organic solvent to form the protective layer, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of attaching a molded resin with an adhesive.
  • the components constituting the protective layer include (meth) acrylic resin, en-thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resin, and polyimide.
  • Resin polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, polyol resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, aramid resin, polyamide resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, modified silicone resin, fluorine Examples thereof include resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacrylonitrile resins, cellulose resins, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , Si 2 N 4 , and the like, and two or more of these components may be contained.
  • the protective layer in the case of a protective layer for the purpose of blocking oxygen, it is preferable that the protective layer contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4 . Further, in the case of a protective layer for the purpose of reducing reflection, it is preferable that the protective layer contains a (meth) acrylic resin and a fluororesin.
  • a known method such as a spin coating method, a casting method, a screen printing method, or an inkjet method can be used as the application method of the resin composition.
  • a known organic solvent for example, propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.
  • the protective layer is formed by the chemical vapor deposition method
  • the known chemical vapor deposition method thermochemical vapor deposition method, plasma chemical vapor deposition method, photochemical vapor deposition method
  • the chemical vapor deposition method is used as the chemical vapor deposition method. Can be used.
  • the protective layer is added with organic fine particles, inorganic fine particles, an absorbent for light of a specific wavelength (for example, ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.), a refractive index adjusting agent, an antioxidant, an adhesive, a surfactant, and the like. It may contain an agent.
  • organic fine particles include polymer fine particles (eg, silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), and examples of inorganic fine particles include titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, and aluminum oxide.
  • Examples thereof include titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride, magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate and the like.
  • a known absorber can be used as the absorber of light having a specific wavelength.
  • the content of these additives can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the protective layer.
  • the protective layer described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP-A-2017-151176 can also be used.
  • the color filter may have a base layer.
  • the surface contact angle of the base layer is preferably 20 to 70 ° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80 ° when measured with water. When the surface contact angle of the base layer is within the above range, the coating property of the coloring composition is good.
  • the surface contact angle of the base layer can be adjusted by, for example, adding a surfactant.
  • the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition wall, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the display device of the present invention has the above-mentioned cured film of the present invention.
  • Examples of the display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence display device.
  • Display Devices (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd., published in 1990)"
  • Display Devices (Junaki Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd.)” (Published in 1989) ”and so on.
  • liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd., published in 1994)".
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "next-generation liquid crystal display technology".
  • the organic electroluminescence display device may have a light source composed of a white organic electroluminescence element.
  • the white organic electroluminescence device preferably has a tandem structure.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-045676 supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, "Frontiers of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection-", Technical Information Association It is described on pages 326-328, 2008 and the like.
  • the spectrum of white light emitted by the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in the blue region (430 nm-485 nm), the green region (530 nm-580 nm), and the yellow region (580 nm-620 nm). In addition to these emission peaks, those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 nm-700 nm) are more preferable.
  • PR177 C.I. I. Pigment Red 177 (red pigment)
  • PR264 C.I. I. Pigment Red 264 (red pigment)
  • PR269 C.I. I. Pigment Red 269 (red pigment)
  • PR254 C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 (red pigment)
  • PR7 C.I. I. Pigment Red 7 (red pigment)
  • Dispersant 1 Solsparse 20000 (manufactured by Japan Lubrizol)
  • Dispersant 2 Resin solution D2 prepared by the following method Put 90.0 parts by mass of cyclohexanone in a reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, thermometer, dropping device, reflux cooler, and gas introduction tube, heat to 60 ° C while injecting nitrogen gas into the vessel, and polymerize at the same temperature.
  • the polymerization reaction was carried out by dropping over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the mixture was further reacted at 60 ° C. for 1 hour, and then 0.5 parts by mass of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile was dissolved in 10.0 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA). Was added, and then stirring was continued at the same temperature for 3 hours to obtain a resin (copolymer). After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was diluted with cyclohexanone to obtain a resin solution D2 having a solid content concentration of 20%. The weight average molecular weight of the obtained resin (copolymer) was 30,000.
  • Pigment derivative 1 A compound having the following structure
  • ⁇ Preparation of coloring composition The raw materials shown below were mixed, stirred, and then filtered using a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 ⁇ m to prepare a colored composition.
  • I-1 Irgure OXE02 (manufactured by BASF, a compound having the following structure)
  • I-2 Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V., compound having the following structure)
  • I-3 Compound with the following structure
  • Resin solution A-1 to A-9 40% by mass PGMEA solution of resin having the following structure
  • Resin solution A-1 was prepared by the following method. That is, 207 parts by mass of PGMEA was placed in a reaction vessel equipped with a thermometer, a cooling tube, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a dropping tube and a stirrer in a separable 4-necked flask, the temperature was raised to 80 ° C., and the inside of the reaction vessel was replaced with nitrogen.
  • A-10 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure.
  • A-111 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure.
  • A-12 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure.
  • D-1 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure.
  • the weight average molecular weight of each resin, the content of the cyclic ether group, the content of the acid group, and the content of the group whose acid group is protected by the protecting group are shown in the table below.
  • the value of the ratio of the content of the cyclic ether group to the content of the acid group is described in the column of content ratio.
  • the value of the ratio of the content of the cyclic ether group to the total content of the acid group and the group in which the acid group is protected by the protecting group is described in the column of content ratio.
  • M-1 Aronix M-402 (Made by Toagosei Co., Ltd., a mixture of dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate)
  • M-3 NK Ester A-TMMT (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • each coloring composition was applied onto a glass substrate so that the film thickness after drying was 2 ⁇ m, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, exposure was performed under the conditions of an exposure illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 1 J / cm 2 . Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to form a cured film. In the preparation of the cured film, the temperature of the substrate is in the range of 20 to 100 ° C. throughout the entire process.
  • the obtained cured film was measured for the absorbance of light in the wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm using an ultraviolet-visible near-infrared spectrophotometer (UV3600, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) using a reference as a glass substrate, and the wavelength was 400.
  • the ratio of the maximum absorbance A max1 for light of up to 500 nm and the minimum absorbance A min1 for light with a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm A max1 / A min1 (hereinafter referred to as the absorbance ratio 1), the absorbance for light with a wavelength of 500 nm is 1.
  • the wavelengths at which the absorbance was 0.3 (hereinafter referred to as wavelength 1) were measured.
  • each coloring composition was applied onto a glass substrate so that the film thickness after drying was 2 ⁇ m, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, exposure was performed under the conditions of an exposure illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 . Then, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). Then, it was rinsed with a spin shower and then washed with pure water. Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • the transmittance (T1) of the obtained cured film having a wavelength of 450 nm was measured.
  • a coloring composition for color mixing evaluation is applied onto this cured film using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying is 2 ⁇ m, and the mixture is dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes to evaluate the color mixing.
  • a coating film of the coloring composition for use was formed, and a laminated film was formed.
  • the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation the blue coloring composition used for forming the blue pixels of Example 1001 described later was used.
  • the glass substrate on which this laminated film was formed was placed on a horizontal rotary table of a spin shower processor (DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and CD-2000 (Fujifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.) Paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 60% diluted solution (manufactured by Co., Ltd.), and the coating film of the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation formed on the cured film was developed and removed.
  • DW-30 type manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.
  • CD-2000 Fujijifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.
  • the above-mentioned glass substrate is fixed to a horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and while the glass substrate is rotated at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device, pure water is supplied from above the center of rotation in a shower shape from above the center of rotation. It was rinsed and then spray dried.
  • MCPD-3000 manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • T2 the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 450 nm of the cured film after the coating film of the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation was developed and removed was measured.
  • the rate of change in transmittance was calculated from the following formula, and the color mixing was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
  • Change rate of transmittance (%)
  • Transmittance change rate is 5% or more Is
  • Thickness increase rate (%) ⁇ (viscosity (V 2 ) -viscosity (V 1 )) / viscosity (V 1 ) ⁇ ⁇ 100
  • the thickening rate is less than 0.1%
  • E The viscosity is 5% or more.
  • Example 1001> The green coloring composition was applied onto the silicon wafer by a spin coating method so that the film thickness after film formation was 1.0 ⁇ m. Then, using a hot plate, it was heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed at an exposure amount of 1000 mJ / cm 2 through a mask with a dot pattern of 12 ⁇ m square. Then, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). Then, it was rinsed with a spin shower and then washed with pure water.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • the red coloring composition and the blue coloring composition were sequentially patterned to form a red coloring pattern (red pixel) and a blue coloring pattern (blue pixel), respectively, to produce a color filter.
  • the red coloring composition the coloring composition of Example 1 was used.
  • the green coloring composition and the blue coloring composition will be described later.
  • the obtained color filter was incorporated into an organic electroluminescence display device according to a known method. This organic electroluminescence display device had suitable image recognition ability.
  • Green coloring composition The following components were mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 ⁇ m to prepare a green coloring composition.
  • Green pigment dispersion 85 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator (Irgacure OXE02, manufactured by BASF) ...
  • Blue coloring composition The following components were mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 ⁇ m to prepare a blue coloring composition.
  • Blue pigment dispersion 51.0 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator (Irgacure OXE01, manufactured by BASF) ...
  • the Green pigment dispersion, the Blue pigment dispersion, the resin solution 1, and the frill group-containing compound solution 1 used for preparing the green coloring composition and the blue coloring composition are as follows.
  • Green pigment dispersion C. I. 7.4 parts by mass of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I.
  • a mixed solution consisting of 5.2 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 1.4 parts by mass of pigment derivative 1, 4.86 parts by mass of dispersant 1, and 81.14 parts by mass of PGMEA was mixed with a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm).
  • the pigment dispersion was prepared by mixing and dispersing according to the diameter) for 3 hours.
  • a high-pressure disperser with a decompression mechanism NANO-3000-10 manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd. was used to perform a dispersion treatment at a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 at a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Green pigment dispersion.
  • Pigment derivative 1 A compound having the following structure
  • Dispersant 1 A resin having the following structure.
  • the numbers in parentheses in the main chain represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit, and the numbers in parentheses in the side chain represent the number of repetitions in the repeating unit.
  • the weight average molecular weight is 24000.
  • Resin solution 1 30% by mass PGMEA solution of resin A synthesized by the following method Put 70.0 parts by mass of cyclohexanone in a separable 4-necked flask equipped with a thermometer, a cooling tube, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a dropping tube and a stirrer, and raise the temperature to 80 ° C. After warming and replacing the inside of the flask with nitrogen, 13.3 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, 4.6 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 4.3 parts by mass of methacrylic acid, and paracumylphenol ethylene oxide modification from the dropping tube.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are: a coloring composition from which it is possible to form a cured film which has superior storage stability and in which mixing of color with other colors is suppressed; a coloring composition; a cured film; a color filter; and a display device. This coloring composition contains a coloring agent including a red coloring agent, a resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photoinitiator. The resin includes a resin EP including a repeating unit A having at least one cyclic ether group A selected from groups represented by formula (e-1) and groups represented by formula (e-2), and at least one repeating unit B selected from a repeating unit B-1 having an acid group and a repeating unit B-2 having a group in which an acid group is protected by a protecting group. In the coloring composition, Amax1/Amin1, which is the ratio of the maximum value Amax1 of absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 400-500 nm and a minimum value Amin1 of absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 550-700 nm, is 25 or more. When the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 500 nm is defined as 1, a wavelength at which the absorbance becomes 0.3 exists in a range of 570-620 nm.

Description

着色組成物、硬化膜、カラーフィルタおよび表示装置Coloring compositions, cured films, color filters and display devices
 本発明は、着色組成物に関する。より詳しくは、カラーフィルタの赤色画素形成などに用いられる着色組成物に関する。また、本発明は、着色組成物を用いた硬化膜、カラーフィルタおよび表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a coloring composition. More specifically, the present invention relates to a coloring composition used for forming red pixels of a color filter and the like. The present invention also relates to a cured film, a color filter and a display device using a coloring composition.
 各種表示装置において、表示画像のカラー化のためにカラーフィルタが一般的に用いられている。カラーフィルタは、着色剤と、樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤とを含む着色組成物を用いて製造されている(例えば、特許文献1など)。 In various display devices, color filters are generally used for colorizing displayed images. The color filter is manufactured by using a coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator (for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).
特開2018-087956号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-087956
 着色組成物を用いてカラーフィルタなどを製造するにあたり、製造直後の着色組成物を用いてカラーフィルタを製造することもある。このため、着色組成物は、保存安定性に優れることが求められている。 When manufacturing a color filter or the like using a coloring composition, a color filter may be manufactured using the coloring composition immediately after production. Therefore, the coloring composition is required to have excellent storage stability.
 一般的にカラーフィルタは、複数色の画素を有している。このような複数色の画素を有するカラーフィルタは、各色の画素形成用の着色組成物を順次パターン形成して各色の画素を形成して製造される。 Generally, a color filter has pixels of a plurality of colors. Such a color filter having pixels of a plurality of colors is manufactured by sequentially forming a pattern of coloring compositions for forming pixels of each color to form pixels of each color.
 一方、近年においては、耐熱性の低い部材(例えば、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示素子などの有機半導体素子)上にカラーフィルタを形成することもある。このような部材は耐熱性が低いため、例えば150℃以下の低温プロセスでカラーフィルタの画素を形成して、支持体への熱的ダメージを抑制することが望ましい。 On the other hand, in recent years, a color filter may be formed on a member having low heat resistance (for example, an organic semiconductor element such as an organic electroluminescence display element). Since such a member has low heat resistance, it is desirable to form pixels of a color filter in, for example, a low temperature process of 150 ° C. or lower to suppress thermal damage to the support.
 しかしながら、低温プロセスで画素を形成した場合、画素の硬化度合が不十分なことがあり、他色の画素を形成する際に、他色の着色組成物との混色が生じて分光特性が変動しやすい傾向にあった。 However, when pixels are formed by a low temperature process, the degree of curing of the pixels may be insufficient, and when forming pixels of other colors, color mixing with a coloring composition of another color occurs and the spectral characteristics fluctuate. It tended to be easy.
 また、本発明者の検討によれば、特許文献1に記載された着色組成物においても、他色との混色についてさらなる改善の余地があることが分かった。 Further, according to the study of the present inventor, it was found that there is room for further improvement in the color mixing with other colors even in the coloring composition described in Patent Document 1.
 よって、本発明の目的は、保存安定性に優れ、かつ、他色との混色が抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる着色組成物、硬化膜、カラーフィルタおよび表示装置を提供することにある。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition, a cured film, a color filter and a display device capable of forming a cured film having excellent storage stability and suppressing color mixing with other colors. be.
 本発明者の検討によれば、後述する着色組成物を用いることで上記目的を達成できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。本発明は以下を提供する。
 <1> 赤色着色剤を含む着色剤と、樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤とを含む着色組成物であって、
 上記樹脂は、式(e-1)で表される基および式(e-2)で表される基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの環状エーテル基Aを有する繰り返し単位Aと、
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位B-1および酸基が保護基で保護された基を有する繰り返し単位B-2から選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位Bと、を含む樹脂EPを含み、
 上記着色組成物は、波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax1と波長550~700nmの光に対する吸光度の最小値Amin1との比Amax1/Amin1が25以上であり、
 波長500nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.3となる波長が570~620nmの範囲に存在する、着色組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式(e-1)中、RE1は水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、nは0または1を表し、*は結合手を表す;
 式(e-2)中、環AE1は単環の脂肪族炭化水素環を表し、*は結合手を表す。
 <2> 上記樹脂EPは、上記環状エーテル基Aの含有量が2.0~6.5mmol/gであり、上記酸基の含有量と上記酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量との合計が0.45~2.35mmol/gである、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
 <3> 上記樹脂EPの上記環状エーテル基Aの含有量と、上記酸基の含有量と、上記酸基とが保護基で保護された基の含有量が下記式(1)の条件を満たす、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物。
 1.0≦(樹脂EPの上記環状エーテル基Aの含有量(単位:mmol/g)/(樹脂EPの上記酸基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)+(樹脂EPの上記酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量(単位:mmol/g))≦14.0    ・・・(1)
 <4> 上記酸基がフェノール性ヒドロキシ基、または、カルボキシ基である、<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <5> 上記保護基は、式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基である、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物;
 式(Y1):-C(RY1)(RY2)(RY3
 式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(RY4)(RY5)(RY6
 式(Y3):-C(RY7)(RY8)(ORY9
 式(Y4):-C(RY10)(H)(ArY1
 式(Y5):-C(=O)(RY11
 式(Y1)中、RY1~RY3は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY1~RY3のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y2)中、RY4~RY6は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY4~RY6のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y3)中、RY7およびRY8は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7およびRY8の少なくとも一方がアルキル基またはアリール基であり、RY9は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y4)中、ArY1は、アリール基を表し、RY10は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す;
 式(Y5)中、RY11は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
 <6> 上記着色剤は、更に黄色着色剤を含む、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <7> 上記着色剤中の上記赤色着色剤の含有量が70質量%以上である、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <8> 全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で硬化膜を形成するために用いられる、<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <9> カラーフィルタ用である、<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <10> 表示装置用である、<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <11> <1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物を硬化して得られる硬化膜。
 <12> <11>に記載の硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ。
 <13> <11>に記載の硬化膜を有する表示装置。
According to the study of the present inventor, it has been found that the above object can be achieved by using the coloring composition described later, and the present invention has been completed. The present invention provides:
<1> A coloring composition containing a colorant containing a red colorant, a resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
The resin comprises a repeating unit A having at least one cyclic ether group A selected from a group represented by the formula (e-1) and a group represented by the formula (e-2).
It comprises a resin EP comprising at least one repeating unit B selected from a repeating unit B-1 having an acid group and a repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group.
The coloring composition has a ratio of A max1 / A min1 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the minimum value A min1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm of 25 or more.
A coloring composition in which a wavelength having an absorbance of 0.3 exists in the range of 570 to 620 nm when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 500 nm is 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
In formula (e-1), RE1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond;
In formula (e-2), ring A E1 represents a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and * represents a bond.
<2> The resin EP has the content of the cyclic ether group A of 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g, and the content of the acid group and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group. The coloring composition according to <1>, wherein the total amount of the above is 0.45 to 2.35 mmol / g.
<3> The content of the cyclic ether group A of the resin EP, the content of the acid group, and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group satisfy the condition of the following formula (1). , <1> or <2>.
1.0 ≦ (Content of the cyclic ether group A of the resin EP (unit: mmol / g) / (Content of the acid group of the resin EP (unit: mmol / g) + (The acid group of the resin EP is Content of groups protected by protecting groups (unit: mmol / g)) ≤14.0 ... (1)
<4> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the acid group is a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group.
<5> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the protecting group is a group represented by any of the formulas (Y1) to (Y5);
Equation ( Y1 ): -C (RY1) ( RY2 ) ( RY3 )
Equation (Y2): -C (= O) OC ( RY4 ) ( RY5 ) ( RY6 )
Equation (Y3): -C ( RY7 ) ( RY8 ) (OR Y9 )
Equation (Y4): -C ( RY10 ) (H) (Ar Y1 )
Equation (Y5): -C (= O) ( RY11 )
In formula ( Y1 ), RY1 to RY3 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY1 to RY3 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y2), RY4 to RY6 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY4 to RY6 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y3), RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl. Representing a group or aryl group, RY7 or RY8 and RY9 may be combined to form a ring;
In formula (Y4), Ar Y1 represents an aryl group and RY10 represents an alkyl or aryl group;
In formula (Y5), RY11 represents an alkyl or aryl group.
<6> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the coloring agent further contains a yellow coloring agent.
<7> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the content of the red colorant in the colorant is 70% by mass or more.
<8> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, which is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process.
<9> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <8>, which is for a color filter.
<10> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <9>, which is for a display device.
<11> A cured film obtained by curing the coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <10>.
<12> The color filter having the cured film according to <11>.
<13> A display device having the cured film according to <11>.
 本発明によれば、保存安定性が良好で、かつ、他色との混色が抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる着色組成物、この着色組成物を用いた硬化膜、カラーフィルタおよび表示装置を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, a coloring composition capable of forming a cured film having good storage stability and suppressed color mixing with other colors, a cured film using this coloring composition, a color filter and a display. Equipment can be provided.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も露光に含める。また、露光に用いられる光としては、一般的に、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の合計質量をいう。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アリル」は、アリルおよびメタリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)および数平均分子量(Mn)は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)により測定したポリスチレン換算値として定義される。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, the notation not describing substitution and non-substitution includes a group having a substituent (atomic group) as well as a group having no substituent (atomic group). Is. For example, the "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
As used herein, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. Further, as the light used for exposure, generally, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, active rays such as electron beams, or radiation can be mentioned.
The numerical range represented by using "-" in the present specification means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
As used herein, the total solid content means the total mass of all the components of the composition excluding the solvent.
As used herein, "(meth) acrylate" represents both acrylate and methacrylate, or either, and "(meth) acrylic" represents both acrylic and methacrylic, or either. ) Allyl ”represents both allyl and / or methacrylic, and“ (meth) acryloyl ”represents both / or either acryloyl and methacrylic acid.
In the present specification, the term "process" is included in this term not only as an independent process but also as long as the intended action of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. ..
In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as polystyrene-equivalent values measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
<着色組成物>
 本発明の着色組成物は、
 赤色着色剤を含む着色剤と、樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤とを含む着色組成物であって、
 上記樹脂は、式(e-1)で表される基および式(e-2)で表される基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの環状エーテル基Aを有する繰り返し単位Aと、酸基を有する繰り返し単位B-1および酸基が保護基で保護された基を有する繰り返し単位B-2から選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位Bと、含む樹脂EPを含み、
 上記着色組成物は、波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax1と波長550~700nmの光に対する吸光度の最小値Amin1との比Amax1/Amin1が25以上であり、
 波長500nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.3となる波長が570~620nmの範囲に存在することを特徴とする。
<Coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention is
A coloring composition containing a colorant containing a red colorant, a resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
The resin has a repeating unit A having at least one cyclic ether group A selected from a group represented by the formula (e-1) and a group represented by the formula (e-2), and a repeating unit having an acid group. It comprises at least one repeating unit B selected from B-1 and a repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protective group, and a resin EP containing.
The coloring composition has a ratio of A max1 / A min1 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the minimum value A min1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm of 25 or more.
When the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 500 nm is 1, the wavelength having an absorbance of 0.3 exists in the range of 570 to 620 nm.
 本発明の着色組成物によれば、保存安定性が良好で、かつ、他色との混色が抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。特に、150℃以下(好ましくは120℃以下、更に好ましくは100℃以下)の低温で硬化膜を形成した場合であっても、他色との混色の抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。 According to the coloring composition of the present invention, it is possible to form a cured film having good storage stability and suppressed color mixing with other colors. In particular, even when the cured film is formed at a low temperature of 150 ° C. or lower (preferably 120 ° C. or lower, more preferably 100 ° C. or lower), it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed. ..
 このような効果が得られる詳細な理由は不明であるが、次によるものであると推測される。上記分光特性を有する着色組成物は、着色組成物を加熱して硬化する際に、熱を逃しにくく、熱を有効利用して樹脂EPなどを硬化させることができると推測される。また、この樹脂EPは反応性が高い樹脂であると推測される。このため、上記分光特性を有する着色組成物中に、上記樹脂EPを含有させることにより、着色組成物を加熱して硬化する際に、着色組成物の硬化が速やかに進行し、その結果、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成できると推測される。このため、本発明の着色組成物によれば、他色との混色が抑制された硬化膜を形成することができると推測される。
 また、着色組成物が上記特定の分光特性を有していることにより、保管時における外光による樹脂や重合性化合物などの硬化性成分の反応を抑制でき、その結果、優れた保存安定性を有していると推測される。
The detailed reason why such an effect is obtained is unknown, but it is presumed to be due to the following. It is presumed that the coloring composition having the above spectral characteristics does not easily release heat when the coloring composition is heated and cured, and the resin EP or the like can be cured by effectively utilizing the heat. Further, it is presumed that this resin EP is a highly reactive resin. Therefore, by containing the resin EP in the coloring composition having the above spectral characteristics, the curing of the coloring composition proceeds rapidly when the coloring composition is heated and cured, and as a result, comparison is made. It is presumed that a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a low temperature. Therefore, according to the coloring composition of the present invention, it is presumed that a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed can be formed.
Further, since the coloring composition has the above-mentioned specific spectral characteristics, it is possible to suppress the reaction of curable components such as resins and polymerizable compounds by external light during storage, and as a result, excellent storage stability is achieved. Presumed to have.
 ある波長λにおける吸光度Aλは、以下の式(Ab1)により定義される。
 Aλ=-log(Tλ/100)   ・・・(Ab1)
 Aλは、波長λにおける吸光度であり、Tλは、波長λの光の透過率(%)である。
The absorbance Aλ at a certain wavelength λ is defined by the following equation (Ab1).
Aλ = -log (Tλ / 100) ... (Ab1)
Aλ is the absorbance at the wavelength λ, and Tλ is the transmittance (%) of light at the wavelength λ.
 本発明において、着色組成物の吸光度の値は、溶液の状態で測定した値であってもよく、着色組成物を用いて製膜した硬化膜の値であってもよい。硬化膜の状態で吸光度を測定する場合は、ガラス基板上にスピンコート等の方法によって着色組成物を塗布し、ホットプレート等を用いて100℃、2分間乾燥し、次いで、光照度20mW/cm、露光量1J/cmの条件でi線露光し、次いで、100℃のホットプレート上で20分間加熱し、常温まで放冷して得られた膜(硬化膜)を用いて測定することが好ましい。吸光度は従来公知の分光光度計を用いて測定できる。 In the present invention, the absorbance value of the coloring composition may be a value measured in a solution state or a value of a cured film formed by using the coloring composition. When measuring the absorbance in the state of a cured film, a coloring composition is applied onto a glass substrate by a method such as spin coating, dried at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate or the like, and then the light illuminance is 20 mW / cm 2 . It is possible to perform i-line exposure under the condition of an exposure amount of 1 J / cm 2 , and then measure using a film (cured film) obtained by heating on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowing to cool to room temperature. preferable. Absorbance can be measured using a conventionally known spectrophotometer.
 本発明の着色組成物は、波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax1と波長550~700nmの光に対する吸光度の最小値Amin1との比Amax1/Amin1が25以上であり、50以上であることが好ましく、100以上であることがより好ましい。上記比Amax1/Amin1の値は高いほど、上述した本発明の効果がより顕著に得られ、更には、他色との色分離性に優れた赤色画素とし易い。このため、上記比Amax1/Amin1の値の上限については、特に限定はないが、例えば、10000以下とすることもでき、5000以下とすることもでき、1000以下とすることもできる。 In the coloring composition of the present invention, the ratio A max1 / A min1 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the minimum value A min1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm is 25 or more, and 50. It is preferably 100 or more, and more preferably 100 or more. The higher the value of the ratio A max1 / A min1 , the more remarkable the effect of the present invention described above can be obtained, and further, it is easy to obtain a red pixel having excellent color separation from other colors. Therefore, the upper limit of the value of the ratio A max1 / A min1 is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 10000 or less, 5000 or less, or 1000 or less.
 本発明の着色組成物が示す波長500nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.3となる波長が570~620nmの範囲に存在し、575~615nmの範囲に存在することが好ましく580~610nmの範囲に存在することがより好ましく、585~605nmの範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。 When the absorbance of the coloring composition of the present invention with respect to light having a wavelength of 500 nm is 1, the wavelength having an absorbance of 0.3 is preferably in the range of 570 to 620 nm and preferably in the range of 575 to 615 nm. It is more preferably present in the range of ~ 610 nm, and even more preferably in the range of 585 to 605 nm.
 本発明の着色組成物が示す波長500nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.5となる波長は、565~605nmの範囲に存在することが好ましく、570~600nmの範囲に存在することがより好ましく、575~595nmの範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。 When the absorbance of the coloring composition of the present invention with respect to light having a wavelength of 500 nm is 1, the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.5 is preferably in the range of 565 to 605 nm, and preferably in the range of 570 to 600 nm. More preferably, it is more preferably present in the range of 575 to 595 nm.
 本発明の着色組成物は、波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax1と波長550nmの光に対する吸光度A550との比Amax1/A550が2以下であることが好ましく、1.75以下であることがより好ましく、1.5以下であることが更に好ましい。 In the coloring composition of the present invention, the ratio A max1 / A 550 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the absorbance A 550 to light having a wavelength of 550 nm is preferably 2.75 or less. It is more preferably less than or equal to, and even more preferably 1.5 or less.
 本発明の着色組成物は、波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax1と波長600nmの光に対する吸光度A600との比Amax1/A600が5~15であることが好ましく、6.5~13.5であることがより好ましく、8~12であることが更に好ましい。 In the coloring composition of the present invention, the ratio A max1 / A 600 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the absorbance A 600 to light having a wavelength of 600 nm is preferably 5 to 15. It is more preferably 5 to 13.5, and even more preferably 8 to 12.
 本発明の着色組成物は、波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax1と波長650nmの光に対する吸光度A650との比Amax1/A650が25以上であることが好ましく、50以上であることがより好ましく、100以上であることが更に好ましい。 In the coloring composition of the present invention, the ratio A max1 / A 650 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance to light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the absorbance A 650 to light having a wavelength of 650 nm is preferably 25 or more, preferably 50 or more. It is more preferably present, and further preferably 100 or more.
 本発明の着色組成物は、膜厚が0.5~3.0μmの硬化膜を形成した際に、膜の厚み方向における波長550~700nmの光に対する透過率の最大値が85%以上で、かつ、平均透過率が50%以上であることが好ましく、膜の厚み方向における波長550~700nmの光に対する透過率の最大値が90%以上で、かつ、平均透過率が55%以上であることがより好ましい。 The colored composition of the present invention has a maximum transmittance of 85% or more for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm in the thickness direction of the film when a cured film having a film thickness of 0.5 to 3.0 μm is formed. Moreover, the average transmittance is preferably 50% or more, the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm in the thickness direction of the film is 90% or more, and the average transmittance is 55% or more. Is more preferable.
 本発明の着色組成物は、膜厚が0.5~3.0μmの硬化膜を形成した際に、波長500nmの光に対する透過率は1%以下であることが好ましく、0.75%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、波長400~500nmの光に対する透過率の最大値は1%以下であることが好ましく、0.75%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5%以下であることが更に好ましい。 The colored composition of the present invention preferably has a transmittance of 1% or less, preferably 0.75% or less, for light having a wavelength of 500 nm when a cured film having a film thickness of 0.5 to 3.0 μm is formed. It is more preferably present, and further preferably 0.5% or less. Further, the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is preferably 1% or less, more preferably 0.75% or less, still more preferably 0.5% or less.
 本発明の着色組成物の固形分濃度は、5~25質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、22.5質量%以下が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましく、18質量%以下が更に好ましい。固形分濃度が上記範囲であれば、全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度(好ましくは120℃以下の温度)で硬化膜(画素)を形成した場合であっても、平坦性に優れた硬化膜(画素)を形成することができる。 The solid content concentration of the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 25% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 22.5% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, still more preferably 18% by mass or less. As long as the solid content concentration is within the above range, the cured film (pixels) having excellent flatness is excellent even when the cured film (pixels) is formed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower (preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower) throughout the entire process. Pixels) can be formed.
 本発明の着色組成物は、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、カラーフィルタの赤色画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができる。 The coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter, and more preferably can be used as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter.
 本発明の着色組成物は、表示装置用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができる。より詳しくは、表示装置用のカラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、表示装置用のカラーフィルタの赤色画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができる。表示装置の種類としては特に限定はないが、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などの有機半導体素子を光源として有する表示装置などが挙げられる。 The coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for a display device. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter for a display device, and more preferably as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter for a display device. The type of the display device is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a display device having an organic semiconductor element as a light source such as an organic electroluminescence display device.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、固体撮像素子用の着色組成物として用いることもできる。より詳しくは、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタの赤色画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができる。 Further, the coloring composition of the present invention can also be used as a coloring composition for a solid-state image sensor. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, and more preferably as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor.
 本発明の着色組成物は、全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度(好ましくは、120℃以下の温度)で硬化膜を形成するために用いられるものであることも好ましい。なお、本明細書において全工程とは、例えば、着色剤組成物を用いて硬化膜を形成する工程を含む。本明細書において全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で硬化膜を形成するとは、限定的ではないが、着色組成物を用いて硬化膜を形成する工程の全てを150℃以下の温度で行うことを意味する。 It is also preferable that the coloring composition of the present invention is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower (preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower) throughout the entire process. In the present specification, the whole step includes, for example, a step of forming a cured film using a colorant composition. In the present specification, forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process is not limited, but all steps of forming a cured film using a coloring composition are performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower. means.
 本発明の着色組成物によって形成される硬化膜および画素の厚さは、0.5~3.0μmであることが好ましい。下限は0.8μm以上が好ましく、1.0μm以上がより好ましく、1.1μm以上がさらに好ましい。上限は2.5μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましく、1.8μm以下がさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the cured film and pixels formed by the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm. The lower limit is preferably 0.8 μm or more, more preferably 1.0 μm or more, still more preferably 1.1 μm or more. The upper limit is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, still more preferably 1.8 μm or less.
 また、本発明の着色組成物によって形成される画素の線幅(パターンサイズ)は、2.0~10.0μmであることが好ましい。上限は7.5μm以下が好ましく、5.0μm以下がより好ましく、4.0μm以下がさらに好ましい。下限は2.25μm以上が好ましく、2.5μm以上がより好ましく、2.75μm以上がさらに好ましい。 Further, the line width (pattern size) of the pixels formed by the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 2.0 to 10.0 μm. The upper limit is preferably 7.5 μm or less, more preferably 5.0 μm or less, still more preferably 4.0 μm or less. The lower limit is preferably 2.25 μm or more, more preferably 2.5 μm or more, still more preferably 2.75 μm or more.
 以下、本発明の着色組成物について詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the coloring composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
<<着色剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は着色剤を含有する。着色剤としては、赤色着色剤、緑色着色剤、青色着色剤、黄色着色剤、紫色着色剤、オレンジ色着色剤などの有彩色着色剤が挙げられる。本発明において、着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。着色剤は、顔料と染料とを併用してもよい。また、顔料は、無機顔料、有機顔料のいずれでもよい。また、顔料には、無機顔料または有機-無機顔料の一部を有機発色団で置換した材料を用いることもできる。無機顔料や有機-無機顔料を有機発色団で置換することで、色相設計をしやすくできる。着色剤として顔料を含むものを用いた場合は、耐熱性や耐光性などの耐久性に優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。着色剤として染料を含むものを用いた場合は、より赤色の色再現域の高い硬化膜を形成しやすい。また、一般的に、染料を用いて得られる硬化膜は、顔料を用いて得られる硬化膜よりも混色が生じやすい傾向にあるが、本発明によれば、着色剤として染料を用いた場合であっても、色移りの抑制された硬化膜を形成することができるので、着色剤として染料を含むものを用いた場合において特に効果的である。
<< Colorant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent. Examples of the colorant include chromatic colorants such as a red colorant, a green colorant, a blue colorant, a yellow colorant, a purple colorant, and an orange colorant. In the present invention, the colorant may be a pigment or a dye. As the colorant, a pigment and a dye may be used in combination. Further, the pigment may be either an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment. Further, as the pigment, an inorganic pigment or a material in which a part of the organic-inorganic pigment is replaced with an organic chromophore can also be used. By substituting inorganic pigments and organic-inorganic pigments with organic chromophores, hue design can be facilitated. When a colorant containing a pigment is used, it is easy to form a cured film having excellent durability such as heat resistance and light resistance. When a colorant containing a dye is used, it is easy to form a cured film having a higher red color reproduction range. Further, in general, a cured film obtained by using a dye tends to cause color mixing more easily than a cured film obtained by using a pigment, but according to the present invention, when a dye is used as a colorant, Even if it is present, it is possible to form a cured film in which color transfer is suppressed, so that it is particularly effective when a colorant containing a dye is used.
 顔料の平均一次粒子径は、1~200nmが好ましい。下限は5nm以上が好ましく、10nm以上がより好ましい。上限は、180nm以下が好ましく、150nm以下がより好ましく、100nm以下が更に好ましい。顔料の平均一次粒子径が上記範囲であれば、着色組成物中における顔料の分散安定性が良好である。なお、本発明において、顔料の一次粒子径は、顔料の一次粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡により観察し、得られた画像写真から求めることができる。具体的には、顔料の一次粒子の投影面積を求め、それに対応する円相当径を顔料の一次粒子径として算出する。また、本発明における平均一次粒子径は、400個の顔料の一次粒子についての一次粒子径の算術平均値とする。また、顔料の一次粒子とは、凝集のない独立した粒子をいう。 The average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm. The lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more. The upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, still more preferably 100 nm or less. When the average primary particle size of the pigment is in the above range, the dispersion stability of the pigment in the coloring composition is good. In the present invention, the primary particle size of the pigment can be obtained from an image photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle-equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment. Further, the average primary particle size in the present invention is an arithmetic average value of the primary particle size for the primary particles of 400 pigments. Further, the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without aggregation.
 着色剤には色素多量体を用いることもできる。色素多量体は、溶剤に溶解して用いられる染料であることが好ましい。また、色素多量体は、粒子を形成していてもよい。色素多量体が粒子である場合は通常溶剤に分散した状態で用いられる。粒子状態の色素多量体は、例えば乳化重合によって得ることができ、特開2015-214682号公報に記載されている化合物および製造方法が具体例として挙げられる。色素多量体は、一分子中に、色素構造を2以上有するものであり、色素構造を3以上有することが好ましい。上限は、特に限定はないが、100以下とすることもできる。一分子中に有する複数の色素構造は、同一の色素構造であってもよく、異なる色素構造であってもよい。色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~50000が好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、6000以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、30000以下がより好ましく、20000以下がさらに好ましい。色素多量体は、特開2011-213925号公報、特開2013-041097号公報、特開2015-028144号公報、特開2015-030742号公報、国際公開第2016/031442号等に記載されている化合物を用いることもできる。 A pigment multimer can also be used as the colorant. The dye multimer is preferably a dye that is used by dissolving it in a solvent. Further, the dye multimer may form particles. When the dye multimer is a particle, it is usually used in a state of being dispersed in a solvent. The dye multimer in the particle state can be obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization, and the compounds and production methods described in JP-A-2015-214682 are specific examples. The dye multimer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less. The plurality of dye structures contained in one molecule may have the same dye structure or may have different dye structures. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50,000. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and even more preferably 6000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, and even more preferably 20,000 or less. Dye multimers are described in JP-A-2011-213925, JP-A-2013-041097, JP-A-2015-028144, JP-A-2015-030742, International Publication No. 2016/031442 and the like. Compounds can also be used.
(赤色着色剤)
 本発明の着色組成物は赤色着色剤を含有する。赤色着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。顔料と染料とを併用してもよい。耐溶剤性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由から赤色着色剤は顔料(赤色顔料)であることが好ましい。
(Red colorant)
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a red colorant. The red colorant may be a pigment or a dye. Pigments and dyes may be used in combination. The red colorant is preferably a pigment (red pigment) because it is easy to form a film having excellent solvent resistance.
 赤色着色剤としては、キサンテン化合物、アントラキノン化合物、モノアゾ化合物、ジアゾ化合物、アゾメチン化合物、アミノケトン化合物、キナクリドン化合物、ペリレン化合物およびジケトピロロピロール化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1つであることが好ましく、アントラキノン化合物、キナクリドン化合物、ペリレン化合物およびジケトピロロピロール化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1つであることがより好ましく、アントラキノン化合物、ペリレン化合物およびジケトピロロピロール化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1つであることが更に好ましく、アントラキノン化合物およびジケトピロロピロール化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1つであることがより一層好ましい。なかでも、より長波側に吸収を持つ化合物であり、本発明の効果がより顕著に得られやすいという理由からアントラキノン化合物であることが特に好ましい。 The red colorant is preferably at least one selected from a xanthene compound, an anthraquinone compound, a monoazo compound, a diazo compound, an azomethine compound, an aminoketone compound, a quinacridone compound, a perylene compound and a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, and an anthraquinone compound, It is more preferably at least one selected from the quinacridone compound, the perylene compound and the diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, further preferably at least one selected from the anthraquinone compound, the perylene compound and the diketopyrrolopyrrole compound, and the anthraquinone compound. And at least one selected from the diketopyrrolopyrrole compound is even more preferred. Among them, an anthraquinone compound is particularly preferable because it is a compound having absorption on the longer wave side and the effect of the present invention can be obtained more remarkably.
 赤色顔料としては、カラーインデックス(C.I.)Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291,294,295,296,297等が挙げられる。 As the red pigment, the color index (CI) Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48: 1 , 48: 2,48: 3,48: 4,49,49: 1,49: 2,52: 1,52: 2,53: 1,57: 1,60: 1,63: 1,66,67 , 81: 1,81: 2,81: 3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172 , 175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255 , 264, 269, 270, 272, 279, 291,294, 295, 296, 297 and the like.
 赤色染料としては、C.I.Acid Red 1,4,8,14,17,18,26,27,29,31,34,35,37,42,44,50,51,52,57,66,73,80,87,88,91,92,94,97,103,111,114,129,133,134,138,143,145,150,151,158,176,183,198,211,215,216,217,249,252,257,260,266,274等が挙げられる。 As a red dye, C.I. I. Acid Red 1,4,8,14,17,18,26,27,29,31,34,35,37,42,44,50,51,52,57,66,73,80,87,88, 91,92,94,97,103,111,114,129,133,134,138,143,145,150,151,158,176,183,198,211,215,216,217,249,252 257, 260, 266, 274 and the like can be mentioned.
 赤色着色剤として、特開2017-201384号公報に記載の構造中に少なくとも1つ臭素原子が置換したジケトピロロピロール化合物、特許第6248838号の段落番号0016~0022に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/102399号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/117965号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2012-229344号公報に記載のナフトールアゾ化合物、特許第6516119号公報に記載の赤色着色剤、特許第6525101号公報に記載の赤色着色剤、特開2020-090632号公報の段落番号0229に記載の臭素化ジケトピロロピロール化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0140741号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0140744号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物、特開2020-079396号公報に記載のペリレン化合物などを用いることもできる。また、赤色着色剤として、芳香族環に対して、酸素原子、硫黄原子または窒素原子が結合した基が導入された芳香族環基がジケトピロロピロール骨格に結合した構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。 As a red colorant, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, and a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in paragraphs 0016 to 0022 of Patent No. 6248838. , The diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in International Publication No. 2012/10239, the diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in International Publication No. 2012/117956, the naphthol azo compound described in JP-A-2012-229344, Patent No. 6516119. The red colorant described in Japanese Patent No. 6525101, the red colorant described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-090632, the brominated diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in paragraph No. 0229 of JP-A-2020-090632, Korean Publication No. 10-2019. It is also possible to use the anthraquinone compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 0147741, the anthraquinone compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-2019-0140744, the perylene compound described in JP-A-2020-079396, and the like. Further, as the red colorant, a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom bonded to the aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton is used. You can also.
 赤色着色剤としては、分光特性や耐久性などの観点から、C.I. Pigment Red 122,177,179,202,254,264,269,272が好ましく、C.I. Pigment Red 177,179,202,254,264,269がより好ましく、C.I. Pigment Red 177,254,264,269が更に好ましく、C.I. Pigment Red 264であることが特に好ましい。 As a red colorant, C.I. I. Pigment Red 122,177,179,202,254,264,269,272 is preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 177,179,202,254,264,269 is more preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 177,254,264,269 is more preferable, and C.I. I. It is particularly preferable that it is Pigment Red 264.
(他の着色剤)
 本発明の着色組成物は、赤色着色剤以外の他の着色剤をさらに含有することが好ましい。併用する他の着色剤としては、黄色着色剤、緑色着色剤、紫色着色剤、青色着色剤、オレンジ色着色剤などが挙げられ、赤色により適した分光特性を有する硬化膜を形成しやすいという理由から黄色着色剤であることが好ましい。また、耐溶剤性に優れた膜を形成しやすいという理由から黄色着色剤は顔料(黄色顔料)であることが好ましい。
(Other colorants)
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably further contains a coloring agent other than the red coloring agent. Examples of other colorants used in combination include a yellow colorant, a green colorant, a purple colorant, a blue colorant, an orange colorant, and the like, because it is easy to form a cured film having spectral characteristics more suitable for red color. It is preferably a yellow colorant. Further, the yellow colorant is preferably a pigment (yellow pigment) because it is easy to form a film having excellent solvent resistance.
 黄色着色剤としては、アゾ化合物、アゾメチン化合物、キノフタロン化合物、イソインドリノン化合物、イソインドリン化合物、プテリジン化合物およびアントラキノン化合物等が挙げられ、アゾ化合物、アゾメチン化合物、イソインドリン化合物およびキノフタロン化合物が好ましく、イソインドリン化合物およびアゾ化合物がより好ましく、イソインドリン化合物が特に好ましい。 Examples of the yellow colorant include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, quinophthalone compounds, isoindolinone compounds, isoindrin compounds, pteridine compounds and anthraquinone compounds, and azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindrin compounds and quinophthalone compounds are preferable. Indoline compounds and azo compounds are more preferred, and isoindolin compounds are particularly preferred.
 黄色着色剤としては、C.I.Pigment Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236等の黄色顔料が挙げられる。 As a yellow colorant, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35: 1,36, 36: 1,37,37: 1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97, 98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139, 147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179, Yellow pigments such as 180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236 can be mentioned.
 また、黄色着色剤としては、下記構造のアゾバルビツール酸ニッケル錯体(アゾ化合物)を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Further, as the yellow colorant, a nickel azobarbituric acid complex (azo compound) having the following structure can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 また、黄色着色剤として、特開2017-201003号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-197719号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-171912号公報の段落番号0011~0062、0137~0276に記載の化合物、特開2017-171913号公報の段落番号0010~0062、0138~0295に記載の化合物、特開2017-171914号公報の段落番号0011~0062、0139~0190に記載の化合物、特開2017-171915号公報の段落番号0010~0065、0142~0222に記載の化合物、特開2013-054339号公報の段落番号0011~0034に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-026228号公報の段落番号0013~0058に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-062644号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物、特開2018-203798号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-062578号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特許第6432076号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-155881号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-111757号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-040835号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2017-197640号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2016-145282号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-085565号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-021139号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-209614号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-209435号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-181015号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-061622号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-032486号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2012-226110号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074987号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-081565号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074986号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074985号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-050420号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-031281号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特公昭48-032765号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2019-008014号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特許第6607427号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2019-073695号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073696号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073697号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073698号公報に記載のメチン染料、韓国公開特許第10-2014-0034963号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-095706号公報に記載の化合物、台湾特許出願公開第201920495号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6607427号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033521号公報に記載のキノフタロン二量体を用いることもできる。また、これらの化合物を多量体化したものも、色価向上の観点から好ましく用いられる。また、黄色着色剤には、下記式(QP1)で表される化合物、下記式(QP2)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Further, as the yellow colorant, the compounds described in JP-A-2017-201003, the compounds described in JP-A-2017-197719, and paragraph numbers 0011 to 0062 and 0137-0276 of JP-A-2017-171912 are described. , The compounds described in paragraphs 0010 to 0062, 0138 to 0295 of JP-A-2017-171913, the compounds described in paragraphs 0011 to 0062, 0139-0190 of JP-A-2017-171914, JP-A-2017. -The compounds described in paragraphs 0010 to 0065 and 0142 to 0222 of JP-A-171915, the quinophthalone compounds described in paragraph numbers 0011 to 0034 of JP2013-054339, paragraph numbers 0013 to JP-A-2014-0226228. The quinophthalone compound described in 0058, the isoindolin compound described in JP-A-2018-062644, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-203798, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-062578, Patent No. 6432076. The quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-155881, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-11175, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-040835, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-040835, JP-A-2017. -Kinophthalone compound described in JP-A-197640, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2016-145282, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2014-0856565, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2014-021139, special The quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-209614, the quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-209435, the quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-181015, and the quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-061622. , A quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-032486, a quinophthalone compound described in JP2012-226110A, a quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-074987, and a quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-081565. Kinophthalone compound, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-074986, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-074985, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-054020, JP-A. The quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-031281, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-48-032765, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2019-008014, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-6607427, JP-A-B. Metin dyes described in JP-A-2019-073695, Metin dyes described in JP-A-2019-073696, Metin dyes described in JP-A-2019-073697, Metin dyes described in JP-A-2019-073698, Compounds described in Korean Publication No. 10-2014-0034963, compounds described in JP-A-2017-095076, compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201920495, compounds described in Patent No. 6607427. , The quinophthalone dimer described in JP-A-2020-033521 can also be used. Further, a multimerized version of these compounds is also preferably used from the viewpoint of improving the color value. Further, as the yellow colorant, a compound represented by the following formula (QP1) and a compound represented by the following formula (QP2) can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式(QP1)中、X~X16は各々独立に水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Zは炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表す。式(QP1)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特許第6443711号公報の段落番号0016に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
In the formula (QP1), X 1 to X 16 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and Z 1 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (QP1) include the compound described in paragraph No. 0016 of Japanese Patent No. 6443711.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式(QP2)中、Y~Yは、それぞれ独立にハロゲン原子を示す。n、mは0~6の整数、pは0~5の整数を表す。(n+m)は1以上である。式(QP2)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特許6432077号公報の段落番号0047~0048に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。 In the formula (QP2), Y1 to Y3 independently represent halogen atoms. n and m represent integers of 0 to 6, and p represents an integer of 0 to 5. (N + m) is 1 or more. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (QP2) include the compounds described in paragraphs 0047 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077.
 黄色着色剤としては、分光特性や耐久性などの観点から、C.I. Pigment Yellow 129,138,139,150,185,215が好ましく、C.I. Pigment Yellow 139,150がより好ましく、C.I. Pigment Yellow 139が更に好ましい。 As a yellow colorant, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, 138, 139, 150, 185, 215 is preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139,150 is more preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139 is even more preferable.
 緑色着色剤としては、C.I.Pigment Green 7,10,36,37,58,59,62,63,64,65,66等の緑色顔料が挙げられる。また、緑色着色剤として、1分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子数が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子数が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、緑色着色剤として中国特許出願第106909027号明細書に記載の化合物、国際公開第2012/102395号に記載のリン酸エステルを配位子として有するフタロシアニン化合物、特開2019-008014号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物および特開2018-180023号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2019-038958号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-076995号公報に記載のコアシェル型色素などを用いることもできる。 As a green colorant, C.I. I. Examples thereof include green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66. Further, as a green colorant, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine having an average number of halogen atoms in one molecule of 10 to 14, a bromine atom of 8 to 12, and a chlorine atom of 2 to 5 on average. Pigments can also be used. Specific examples include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720. Further, as a green colorant, the compound described in Chinese Patent Application No. 1069090227, the phthalocyanine compound having a phosphate ester as a ligand according to International Publication No. 2012/102395, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-008014. The phthalocyanine compound and the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2018-180023, the compound described in JP-A-2019-038958, the core-shell type dye described in JP-A-2020-076955, and the like can also be used.
 緑色着色剤としては、分光特性や耐久性などの観点から、C.I. Pigment Green 7,36,37,58,59,65が好ましく、C.I. Pigment Green 7,36,58,65がより好ましく、C.I. Pigment Green 7,36が更に好ましい。 As a green colorant, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7,36,37,58,59,65 is preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Green 7,36,58,65 is more preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Green 7,36 is more preferable.
 青色着色剤としては、C.I.Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88等の青色顔料が挙げられる。また、青色着色剤として、リン原子を有するアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2012-247591号公報の段落番号0022~0030、特開2011-157478号公報の段落番号0047に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As a blue colorant, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15: 1,15: 2,15: 3,15: 4,15: 6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88 etc. Pigments can be mentioned. Further, as the blue colorant, an aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP2012-247591A and paragraph numbers 0047 of JP2011-157478A.
 青色着色剤としては、分光特性や耐久性などの観点から、C.I. Pigment Blue 15,15:4,15:6,16,60,64,79が好ましく、C.I. Pigment Blue 15:4,15:6,16,60,64がより好ましく、C.I. Pigment Blue 15:4,15:6が更に好ましい。 As a blue colorant, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15,15: 4,15: 6,16,60,64,79 is preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 4,15: 6,16,60,64 is more preferable, and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 4, 15: 6 is more preferable.
 紫色着色剤としては、C.I.Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61等の紫色顔料が挙げられる。 As a purple colorant, C.I. I. Examples thereof include purple pigments such as Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61.
 オレンジ色着色剤としては、C.I.Pigment Orange 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等のオレンジ色顔料が挙げられる。 As an orange colorant, C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2,5,13,16,17: 1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73, etc. The orange pigment of.
 着色剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中5~70質量%が好ましい。下限は、10質量%以上が好ましく、15質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、60質量%以下が好ましく、55質量%以下が更に好ましく、50質量%以下がより一層好ましい。 The content of the colorant is preferably 5 to 70% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 15% by mass or more, still more preferably 20% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 60% by mass or less, more preferably 55% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less.
 着色剤中における赤色着色剤の含有量は70質量%以上であることが好ましく、80質量%以上であることがより好ましく、90質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。着色剤中における赤色着色剤の含有量の上限値は、100質量%以下であることが好ましく、95質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the red colorant in the colorant is preferably 70% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, and further preferably 90% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content of the red colorant in the colorant is preferably 100% by mass or less, and more preferably 95% by mass or less.
 着色組成物に含まれる着色剤は、赤色着色剤と黄色着色剤とを含むことが好ましい。また、黄色着色剤の含有量は、赤色着色剤の100質量部に対して、3~45質量部であることが好ましい。下限は、5質量部以上であることが好ましく、8質量部以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、30質量部以下であることが好ましく、15質量部以下であることがより好ましい。また、着色剤中における赤色着色剤と黄色着色剤との合計の含有量は70質量%以上であることが好ましく、80質量%以上であることがより好ましく、90質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。 The colorant contained in the coloring composition preferably contains a red colorant and a yellow colorant. The content of the yellow colorant is preferably 3 to 45 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the red colorant. The lower limit is preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 8 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 30 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 15 parts by mass or less. The total content of the red colorant and the yellow colorant in the colorant is preferably 70% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, and further preferably 90% by mass or more. preferable.
<<樹脂>>
 本発明の着色組成物は樹脂を含む。樹脂は、例えば、顔料等を着色組成物中で分散させる用途や、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料等を着色組成物中で分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的として樹脂を使用することもできる。
<< Resin >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition or for the purpose of a binder. A resin mainly used for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition is also referred to as a dispersant. However, such an application of the resin is an example, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such an application.
(樹脂EP)
 本発明の着色組成物は、式(e-1)で表される基および式(e-2)で表される基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの環状エーテル基A(以下、特定環状エーテル基ともいう)を有する繰り返し単位Aと、酸基を有する繰り返し単位B-1および酸基が保護基で保護された基を有する繰り返し単位B-2から選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位Bと、含む樹脂EP(以下、樹脂EPともいう)を含む。
(Resin EP)
The coloring composition of the present invention has at least one cyclic ether group A (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific cyclic ether group) selected from a group represented by the formula (e-1) and a group represented by the formula (e-2). ), At least one repeating unit B selected from the repeating unit A having an acid group, the repeating unit B-1 having an acid group, and the repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group, and a resin EP (containing). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as resin EP).
 樹脂EPの重量平均分子量は、2000~70000が好ましい。上限は、60000以下であることが好ましく、50000以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、3000以上であることが好ましく、5000以上であることがより好ましい。樹脂EPの重量平均分子量が上記範囲であれば混色と保存安定性をより高い水準で両立させやすい。 The weight average molecular weight of the resin EP is preferably 2000 to 70000. The upper limit is preferably 60,000 or less, and more preferably 50,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 3000 or more, and more preferably 5000 or more. If the weight average molecular weight of the resin EP is in the above range, it is easy to achieve both color mixing and storage stability at a higher level.
 樹脂EPの上記特定環状エーテル基の含有量は2.0~6.5mmol/gであることが好ましい。樹脂EPの上記特定環状エーテル基の含有量が2.0~6.5mmol/gであれば比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成でき、着色組成物の保存安定性も良好である。上限は、着色組成物の保存安定性の観点から6.3mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、6.0mmol/g以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、膜の硬化性の観点から2.5mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、3.0mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、3.2mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましく、3.4mmol/g以上であることが特に好ましい。 The content of the specific cyclic ether group in the resin EP is preferably 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g. If the content of the specific cyclic ether group in the resin EP is 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g, a cured film that is sufficiently cured can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and the storage stability of the colored composition is also good. Is. The upper limit is preferably 6.3 mmol / g or less, more preferably 6.0 mmol / g or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 2.5 mmol / g or more, more preferably 3.0 mmol / g or more, still more preferably 3.2 mmol / g or more, from the viewpoint of film curability. It is particularly preferable that it is 4 mmol / g or more.
 樹脂EPの酸基の含有量と酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量との合計は0.45~2.35mmol/gであることが好ましい。樹脂EPの上記合計が0.45~2.35mmol/gであれば比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成でき、着色組成物の保存安定性も良好である。上限は、着色組成物の保存安定性の観点から2.25mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、2.15mmol/g以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、膜の硬化性の観点から0.7mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、0.9mmol/g以上であることがより好ましい。 The total content of the acid group of the resin EP and the content of the group whose acid group is protected by the protecting group is preferably 0.45 to 2.35 mmol / g. When the total of the resin EP is 0.45 to 2.35 mmol / g, a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and the storage stability of the colored composition is also good. The upper limit is preferably 2.25 mmol / g or less, more preferably 2.15 mmol / g or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 0.7 mmol / g or more, and more preferably 0.9 mmol / g or more from the viewpoint of film curability.
 樹脂EPは、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。この態様によれば、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成でき、他色との混色がより抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。さらには、着色組成物を用いてパターン状に露光した際に、未露光部を現像液で現像除去させやすく、現像性にも優れており、未露光部の残渣の発生をより抑制できる。樹脂EPの酸基の含有量は0.45~2.35mmol/gであることが好ましい。上限は、2.25mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、2.15mmol/g以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、0.55mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、0.65mmol/g以上であることがより好ましい。 The resin EP preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group. According to this aspect, it is possible to form a cured film that is sufficiently cured even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is more suppressed. Further, when the unexposed portion is exposed in a pattern using the coloring composition, the unexposed portion can be easily developed and removed with a developing solution, the developability is excellent, and the generation of the residue in the unexposed portion can be further suppressed. The acid group content of the resin EP is preferably 0.45 to 2.35 mmol / g. The upper limit is preferably 2.25 mmol / g or less, and more preferably 2.15 mmol / g or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.55 mmol / g or more, and more preferably 0.65 mmol / g or more.
 樹脂EPの上記特定環状エーテル基の含有量と、酸基の含有量と、酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量は、下記式(1)の条件を満たすことが好ましく、下記式(2)の条件を満たすことがより好ましく、下記式(3)の条件を満たすことが更に好ましい。
 1.0≦(樹脂EPの特定環状エーテル基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)/(樹脂EPの酸基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)+(樹脂EPの酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量(単位:mmol/g))≦14.0    ・・・(1)
 2.5≦(樹脂EPの特定環状エーテル基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)/(樹脂EPの酸基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)+(樹脂EPの酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量(単位:mmol/g))≦12.0    ・・・(2)
 4.0≦(樹脂EPの特定環状エーテル基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)/(樹脂EPの酸基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)+(樹脂EPの酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量(単位:mmol/g))≦10.0    ・・・(3)
The content of the specific cyclic ether group, the content of the acid group, and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by the protecting group preferably satisfy the condition of the following formula (1), and the following formula is preferable. It is more preferable that the condition of (2) is satisfied, and it is further preferable that the condition of the following formula (3) is satisfied.
1.0 ≦ (Content of specific cyclic ether group of resin EP (unit: mmol / g) / (Content of acid group of resin EP (unit: mmol / g)) + (acid group of resin EP is a protecting group) Content of protected group (unit: mmol / g)) ≤14.0 ... (1)
2.5 ≦ (Content of specific cyclic ether group of resin EP (unit: mmol / g) / (Content of acid group of resin EP (unit: mmol / g)) + (acid group of resin EP is a protecting group Content of protected group (unit: mmol / g)) ≤12.0 ... (2)
4.0 ≦ (Content of specific cyclic ether group of resin EP (unit: mmol / g) / (Content of acid group of resin EP (unit: mmol / g)) + (acid group of resin EP is a protecting group Content of protected group (unit: mmol / g)) ≤ 10.0 ... (3)
 樹脂EPが酸基の含有量と、酸基が保護基で保護された基とをそれぞれ含む場合、樹脂EPの酸基の含有量と、酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量は、下記式(11)の条件を満たすことが好ましく、下記式(12)の条件を満たすことがより好ましく、下記式(13)の条件を満たすことが更に好ましい。この態様によれば、着色組成物の保存安定性が良好で、着色組成物を用いてパターン状に露光した際に、未露光部を現像液で現像除去させやすく、現像性にも優れており、未露光部の残渣の発生をより抑制できる。
 0.1≦(樹脂EPの酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)/樹脂EPの酸基の含有量(単位:mmol/g))≦2.0    ・・・(11)
 0.2≦(樹脂EPの酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)/樹脂EPの酸基の含有量(単位:mmol/g))≦1.9    ・・・(12)
 0.3≦(樹脂EPの酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)/樹脂EPの酸基の含有量(単位:mmol/g))≦1.8    ・・・(13)
When the resin EP contains an acid group content and a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group, respectively, the content of the acid group in the resin EP and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by the protecting group are , The condition of the following formula (11) is preferable, the condition of the following formula (12) is more preferable, and the condition of the following formula (13) is further preferable. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition is good, and when the coloring composition is exposed in a pattern, the unexposed portion can be easily developed and removed with a developing solution, and the developability is also excellent. , The generation of residue in the unexposed area can be further suppressed.
0.1 ≤ (content of group in which the acid group of the resin EP is protected by a protecting group (unit: mmol / g) / content of the acid group of the resin EP (unit: mmol / g)) ≤ 2.0.・ ・ (11)
0.2 ≤ (content of group in which the acid group of the resin EP is protected by a protecting group (unit: mmol / g) / content of the acid group of the resin EP (unit: mmol / g)) ≤ 1.9.・ ・ (12)
0.3 ≤ (content of group in which the acid group of the resin EP is protected by a protecting group (unit: mmol / g) / content of the acid group of the resin EP (unit: mmol / g)) ≤ 1.8.・ ・ (13)
〔繰り返し単位A〕
 樹脂EPは、式(e-1)で表される基および式(e-2)で表される基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの環状エーテル基(以下、特定環状エーテル基ともいう。)を有する繰り返し単位Aを含む。架橋密度の高い膜を形成できるという理由から特定環状エーテル基は、式(e-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
[Repeating unit A]
The resin EP has at least one cyclic ether group (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific cyclic ether group) selected from the group represented by the formula (e-1) and the group represented by the formula (e-2). Includes unit A. The specific cyclic ether group is preferably a group represented by the formula (e-1) because a film having a high crosslink density can be formed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 式(e-1)中、RE1は水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、nは0または1を表し、*は結合手を表す;
 式(e-2)中、環AE1は単環の脂肪族炭化水素環を表し、*は結合手を表す。
In formula (e-1), RE1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond;
In formula (e-2), ring A E1 represents a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and * represents a bond.
 RE1が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい。RE1が表すアルキル基は、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RE1 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, further preferably 1 to 5, and particularly preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group represented by RE1 is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
 nが0のとき、RE1は水素原子であることが好ましい。nが1のとき、RE1は水素原子または炭素数1~3のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 When n is 0, it is preferable that RE1 is a hydrogen atom. When n is 1, RE1 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 ここで、式(e-1)のnが0のとき、式(e-1)は以下の式(e-1a)で表される基である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Here, when n in the formula (e-1) is 0, the formula (e-1) is a group represented by the following formula (e-1a).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式(e-2)の環AE1が表す単環の脂肪族炭化水素環としては、5~7員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが好ましく、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましく、6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが更に好ましい。具体例としては、シクロペンタン環、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環が挙げられ、シクロペンタン環またはシクロヘキサン環であることが好ましく、シクロヘキサン環であることがより好ましい。式(e-2)で表される基の具体例としては、以下に示す基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
The monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by the ring AE1 of the formula (e-2) is preferably a 5- to 7-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered aliphatic ring. It is more preferably a hydrocarbon ring, and even more preferably a 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. Specific examples include a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, and a cycloheptane ring, preferably a cyclopentane ring or a cyclohexane ring, and more preferably a cyclohexane ring. Specific examples of the group represented by the formula (e-2) include the groups shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 繰り返し単位Aとしては、下記式(A-1)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Examples of the repeating unit A include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 式(A-1)において、Xa1は3価の連結基を表し、La1は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Za1は上記の環状エーテル基を表す。 In formula (A-1), X a1 represents a trivalent linking group, La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z a1 represents the above cyclic ether group.
 式(A-1)のXa1が表す3価の連結基としては、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基、ノボラック系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基およびノボラック系連結基が好ましく、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基がより好ましい。 Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by Xa1 of the formula (A-1) include a poly (meth) acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine-based linking group, a polyester-based linking group, a polyurethane-based linking group, and a polyurea-based linking group. Examples thereof include polyamide-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polystyrene-based linking groups, bisphenol-based linking groups, novolak-based linking groups, poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polyester-based linking groups, Bisphenol-based linking groups and novolak-based linking groups are preferable, and poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups are more preferable.
 式(A-1)のLa1が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。 Examples of the divalent linking group represented by La1 of the formula (A-1) include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), and-. NH-, -SO-, -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S- and groups consisting of a combination of two or more of these can be mentioned. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
 樹脂EPにおいて、繰り返し単位Aの含有量は、樹脂EPの全繰り返し単位中15~95モル%であることが好ましい。上限は85モル%以下であることが好ましく、75モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、20モル%以上が好ましく、30モル%以上がより好ましい。 In the resin EP, the content of the repeating unit A is preferably 15 to 95 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP. The upper limit is preferably 85 mol% or less, more preferably 75 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 20 mol% or more, more preferably 30 mol% or more.
〔繰り返し単位B〕
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位B-1(以下、繰り返し単位B-1ともいう)および酸基が保護基で保護された基を有する繰り返し単位B-2(以下、繰り返し単位B-2ともいう)から選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位Bを含む。樹脂EPは、繰り返し単位B-1および繰り返し単位B-2のいずれか一方のみを含んでいてもよく、繰り返し単位B-1と繰り返し単位B-2とをそれぞれ含んでいてもよい。樹脂EPは、少なくとも繰り返し単位B-1を含むことが好ましい。
[Repeating unit B]
From the repeating unit B-1 having an acid group (hereinafter, also referred to as repeating unit B-1) and the repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group (hereinafter, also referred to as repeating unit B-2). Includes at least one repeating unit B chosen. The resin EP may contain only one of the repeating unit B-1 and the repeating unit B-2, or may contain the repeating unit B-1 and the repeating unit B-2, respectively. The resin EP preferably contains at least the repeating unit B-1.
 樹脂EPが繰り返し単位B-1を有する場合には、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成でき、他色との混色がより抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。さらには、着色組成物を用いてパターン状に露光した際に、未露光部を現像液で現像除去させやすく、現像性にも優れており、未露光部の残渣の発生をより抑制できる。
 また、樹脂EPが繰り返し単位B-2を含む場合には、着色組成物の保存時における樹脂EPの上記特定環状エーテル基の反応の進行などを抑制することができ、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上できる。
 また、樹脂EPが繰り返し単位B-1と繰り返し単位B-2とをそれぞれ含む場合には、着色組成物の保存安定性、現像性、得られる硬化膜の混色の抑制をより高い水準で並立させることができる。
When the resin EP has the repeating unit B-1, it is possible to form a cured film that is sufficiently cured even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is further suppressed. Further, when the unexposed portion is exposed in a pattern using the coloring composition, the unexposed portion can be easily developed and removed with a developing solution, the developability is excellent, and the generation of the residue in the unexposed portion can be further suppressed.
Further, when the resin EP contains the repeating unit B-2, it is possible to suppress the progress of the reaction of the specific cyclic ether group of the resin EP during storage of the coloring composition, and the storage stability of the coloring composition can be suppressed. Can be further improved.
Further, when the resin EP contains the repeating unit B-1 and the repeating unit B-2, the storage stability of the coloring composition, the developability, and the suppression of the color mixing of the obtained cured film are arranged at a higher level. be able to.
 上記繰り返し単位B-1が有する酸基、および、上記繰り返し単位B-2における上記保護基で保護されている酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基またはカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the acid group contained in the repeating unit B-1 and the acid group protected by the protecting group in the repeating unit B-2 include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group. , A phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
 上記繰り返し単位B-2における上記酸基を保護する保護基としては、酸または塩基の作用により分解して脱離する基が挙げられる。保護基は、式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましく、脱保護しやすいという理由から式(Y3)または式(Y5)で表される基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the protecting group that protects the acid group in the repeating unit B-2 include a group that decomposes and is eliminated by the action of an acid or a base. The protecting group is preferably a group represented by any of the formulas (Y1) to (Y5), and is a group represented by the formula (Y3) or the formula (Y5) because it is easy to deprotect. Is more preferable.
 式(Y1):-C(RY1)(RY2)(RY3
 式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(RY4)(RY5)(RY6
 式(Y3):-C(RY7)(RY8)(ORY9
 式(Y4):-C(RY10)(H)(ArY1
 式(Y5):-C(=O)(RY11
Equation ( Y1 ): -C (RY1) ( RY2 ) ( RY3 )
Equation (Y2): -C (= O) OC ( RY4 ) ( RY5 ) ( RY6 )
Equation (Y3): -C ( RY7 ) ( RY8 ) (OR Y9 )
Equation (Y4): -C ( RY10 ) (H) (Ar Y1 )
Equation (Y5): -C (= O) ( RY11 )
 式(Y1)中、RY1~RY3は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY1~RY3のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y2)中、RY4~RY6は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY4~RY6のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y3)中、RY7およびRY8は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7およびRY8の少なくとも一方がアルキル基またはアリール基であり、RY9は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y4)中、ArY1は、アリール基を表し、RY10は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す;
 式(Y5)中、RY11は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
In formula ( Y1 ), RY1 to RY3 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY1 to RY3 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y2), RY4 to RY6 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY4 to RY6 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y3), RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl. Representing a group or aryl group, RY7 or RY8 and RY9 may be combined to form a ring;
In formula (Y4), Ar Y1 represents an aryl group and RY10 represents an alkyl or aryl group;
In formula (Y5), RY11 represents an alkyl or aryl group.
 式(Y1)のRY1~RY3が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状であることが好ましい。式(Y1)において、RY1~RY3の2つが結合して、環を形成してもよい。RY1~RY3の2つが結合して形成される環としては、シクロペンチル基やシクロヘキシル基などの単環のシクロアルキル基、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及び、アダマンチル基などの多環のシクロアルキル基が挙げられ、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基であることが好ましい。また、上記のシクロアルキル基においては、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、又は、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RY1 to RY3 in the formula ( Y1 ) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. In the formula ( Y1 ), two of RY1 to RY3 may be combined to form a ring. The ring formed by the bond of RY1 to RY3 includes a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl. Examples thereof include a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a group, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable. Further, in the above cycloalkyl group, one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
 式(Y2)のRY4~RY6が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状であることが好ましい。式(Y2)のRY4~RY6のうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であることが好ましい。式(Y2)において、RY4~RY6の2つが結合して、環を形成していてもよい。形成される環としては、式(Y1)で説明した環が挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RY4 to RY6 in the formula (Y2) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. It is preferable that at least two of RY4 to RY6 of the formula (Y2) are methyl groups. In the formula (Y2), two of RY4 to RY6 may be combined to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed include the ring described by the formula (Y1).
 式(Y3)中、RY7およびRY8は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7およびRY8の少なくとも一方がアルキル基またはアリール基であり、RY9は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成してもよい。
アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して形成される環としては、テトラヒドロフラニル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基等が挙げられる。式(Y3)において、RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成していることが好ましい。また、RY7およびRY8の一方は水素原子であることが好ましい。
In formula (Y3), RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl. It represents a group or an aryl group, and RY7 or RY8 may be bonded to RY9 to form a ring.
The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. Examples of the ring formed by binding RY7 or RY8 and RY9 include a tetrahydrofuranyl group and a tetrahydropyranyl group. In the formula (Y3), it is preferable that RY7 or RY8 and RY9 are bonded to form a ring. Further, it is preferable that one of RY7 and RY8 is a hydrogen atom.
 式(Y4)中、ArY1は、アリール基を表し、RY10は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、ArY1とRY10とは互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。式(Y4)においてRY10は、アルキル基であることが好ましい。 In formula (Y4), Ar Y1 represents an aryl group, RY10 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and Ar Y1 and RY10 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. In the formula (Y4), RY10 is preferably an alkyl group.
 式(Y5)中、RY11は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。 In the formula (Y5), RY11 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
 保護基の分子量は40~200であることが好ましく、40~150であることがより好ましく、40~120であることが更に好ましい。保護基の分子量が上記範囲であれば保存安定性に優れ、かつ、低温での硬化性に優れた着色組成物とすることができる。 The molecular weight of the protecting group is preferably 40 to 200, more preferably 40 to 150, and even more preferably 40 to 120. When the molecular weight of the protecting group is within the above range, a coloring composition having excellent storage stability and excellent curability at a low temperature can be obtained.
 保護基の具体例としては、1-メトキシエチル基、1-エトキシエチル基、1-n-プロポキシエチル基、1-n-ブトキシエチル基、1-t-ブトキシエチル基、1-シクロペンチルオキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基、シクロヘキシル(メトキシ)メチル基、α-メトキシベンジル基、α-エトキシベンジル基、α-n-プロポキシベンジル基、2-フェニル-1-メトキシエチル基、2-フェニル-1-エトキシエチル基、2-フェニル-1-イソプロポキシエチル基、2-テトラヒドロフラニル基、2-テトラヒドロピラニル基が挙げられ、1-エトキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基、2-テトラヒドロフラニル基、2-テトラヒドロピラニル基が好ましく、1-エトキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基がより好ましい。 Specific examples of the protective group include 1-methoxyethyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-n-propoxyethyl group, 1-n-butoxyethyl group, 1-t-butoxyethyl group and 1-cyclopentyloxyethyl group. , 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group, cyclohexyl (methoxy) methyl group, α-methoxybenzyl group, α-ethoxybenzyl group, α-n-propoxybenzyl group, 2-phenyl-1-methoxyethyl group, 2-phenyl-1 -Ethyl group, 2-phenyl-1-isopropoxyethyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuranyl group, 2-tetrahydropyranyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuranyl group , 2-Tetrahydropyranyl group is preferable, 1-ethoxyethyl group and 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group are more preferable.
 繰り返し単位B-1としては、下記式(B1)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。また、繰り返し単位B-2としては、下記式(B2)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Examples of the repeating unit B-1 include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B1). Further, as the repeating unit B-2, a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B2) can be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式(B1)において、Xb1は3価の連結基を表し、Lb1は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Zb1は酸基を表す。
 式(B2)において、Xb2は3価の連結基を表し、Lb2は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Zb2は酸基が保護基で保護された基を表す。
In formula (B1), X b1 represents a trivalent linking group, L b1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z b1 represents an acid group.
In formula (B2), X b2 represents a trivalent linking group, L b2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z b2 represents a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group.
 式(B1)のXb1が表す3価の連結基および式(B2)のXb2が表す3価の連結基としては、特に限定はない。例えば、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基、ノボラック系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基およびノボラック系連結基が好ましく、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基がより好ましい。 The trivalent linking group represented by X b1 of the formula (B1) and the trivalent linking group represented by X b2 of the formula (B2) are not particularly limited. For example, poly (meth) acrylic linking group, polyalkyleneimine-based linking group, polyester-based linking group, polyurethane-based linking group, polyurea-based linking group, polyamide-based linking group, polyether-based linking group, polystyrene-based linking group, bisphenol. Examples thereof include a system-based linking group and a novolak-based linking group, and poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polyester-based linking groups, bisphenol-based linking groups and novolac-based linking groups are preferable, and poly (meth) acrylic is preferable. System linking groups are more preferred.
 式(B1)のLb1が表す2価の連結基および式(B2)のLb3が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。 The divalent linking group represented by L b1 of the formula (B1) and the divalent linking group represented by L b3 of the formula (B2) include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms) and an arylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms). (Preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S- and two or more of these. Examples are combined groups. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
 式(B1)のZb1は酸基を表す。酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基またはカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Z b1 in the formula (B1) represents an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
 式(B2)のZb2は酸基が保護基で保護された基を表す。酸基が保護基で保護された基としては、酸基が上述した式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基で保護された基が挙げられ、酸基が式(Y3)または式(Y5)で表される基で保護された基であることが好ましい。上記酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基またはカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Z b2 of the formula (B2) represents a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group. Examples of the group in which the acid group is protected by the protecting group include a group in which the acid group is protected by a group represented by any of the above-mentioned formulas (Y1) to (Y5), and the acid group is the formula (Y3). Alternatively, it is preferably a group protected by a group represented by the formula (Y5). Examples of the acid group include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
 繰り返し単位B2の一態様として、下記式(B2-1)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 式(B2-1)中、Rb11~Rb13はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子またはアルキル基を表し、Lb11は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Zb11は式(Z-1)または式(Z-2)で表される基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 式(Z-1)および式(Z-2)中、Yb11は保護基を表し、*はLb11と結合する部分を表す。
As one aspect of the repeating unit B2, a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B2-1) can be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
In the formula (B2-1), R b11 to R b13 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkyl group, L b11 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z b11 represents the formula (Z). Represents a group represented by -1) or formula (Z-2);
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
In the formula (Z-1) and the formula (Z-2), Y b11 represents a protecting group, and * represents a portion to be bonded to L b11 .
 Rb11~Rb13が表すハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子などが挙げられる。
 Rb11~Rb13が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状であることが好ましい。
 Lb11が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。
Examples of the halogen atom represented by R b11 to R b13 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R b11 to R b13 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 5. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched.
Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L b11 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, and -SO-. Examples thereof include -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and a group consisting of a combination of two or more of these. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
 式(Z-1)および式(Z-2)のYb11が表す保護基としては、上述した式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基が挙げられる。式(B2-1)のZb11が式(Z-1)で表される基の場合、Yb11は式(Y5)であることが好ましい。式(B2-1)のZb11が式(Z-2)で表される基の場合、Yb11は式(Y3)であることが好ましい。 Examples of the protecting group represented by Y b11 of the formula (Z-1) and the formula (Z-2) include a group represented by any of the above-mentioned formulas (Y1) to (Y5). When Z b11 of the formula (B2-1) is a group represented by the formula (Z-1), it is preferable that Y b11 is the formula (Y5). When Z b11 of the formula (B2-1) is a group represented by the formula (Z-2), it is preferable that Y b11 is the formula (Y3).
 式(B2-1)のZb11が式(Z-1)で表される基の場合は、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上できる。式(B2-1)のZb11が式(Z-2)で表される基の場合は、低温での硬化性に優れた着色組成物とすることができる。 When Z b11 of the formula (B2-1) is a group represented by the formula (Z-1), the storage stability of the colored composition can be further improved. When Z b11 of the formula (B2-1) is a group represented by the formula (Z-2), a coloring composition having excellent curability at a low temperature can be obtained.
 樹脂EPにおいて、繰り返し単位Bの含有量は、樹脂EPの全繰り返し単位中5~85モル%であることが好ましい。上限は60モル%以下であることが好ましく、40モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、8モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましい。 In the resin EP, the content of the repeating unit B is preferably 5 to 85 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP. The upper limit is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 40 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 8 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more.
 樹脂EPが繰り返し単位B-1を含む場合、樹脂EP中における単位B-1の含有量は、樹脂EPの全繰り返し単位中5~85モル%であることが好ましい。上限は60モル%以下であることが好ましく、40モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、8モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましい。 When the resin EP contains the repeating unit B-1, the content of the unit B-1 in the resin EP is preferably 5 to 85 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP. The upper limit is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 40 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 8 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more.
 樹脂EPが繰り返し単位B-2を含む場合、樹脂EP中における単位B-2の含有量は、樹脂EPの全繰り返し単位中1~65モル%であることが好ましい。上限は45モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上が好ましく、3モル%以上がより好ましい。 When the resin EP contains the repeating unit B-2, the content of the unit B-2 in the resin EP is preferably 1 to 65 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP. The upper limit is preferably 45 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 2 mol% or more, more preferably 3 mol% or more.
 樹脂EPが繰り返し単位B-1と繰り返し単位B-2とをそれぞれを含む場合、樹脂EPは、繰り返し単位B-1の1モルに対して繰り返し単位B-2を0.4~3.2モル含むことが好ましく、0.8~2.8モル含むことがより好ましく、1.2~2.4モル含むことが更に好ましい。この態様によれば、着色組成物の保存安定性、現像性、得られる硬化膜の混色の抑制をより高い水準で並立させることができる。 When the resin EP contains the repeating unit B-1 and the repeating unit B-2, respectively, the resin EP contains 0.4 to 3.2 mol of the repeating unit B-2 for 1 mol of the repeating unit B-1. It is preferably contained, more preferably 0.8 to 2.8 mol, still more preferably 1.2 to 2.4 mol. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition, the developability, and the suppression of the color mixing of the obtained cured film can be made parallel at a higher level.
〔繰り返し単位C〕
 樹脂EPは、上記繰り返し単位A、及び、繰り返し単位B以外の繰り返し単位として、炭化水素環基を含む繰り返し単位(以下、他の繰り返し単位ともいう)を含有していてもよい。炭化水素環基は、脂肪族炭化水素環基であってもよく、芳香族炭化水素環基であってもよい。また、炭化水素環基は、単環の炭化水素環基であってもよく、縮合環や架橋環などの多環式の炭化水素環基であってもよい。また、芳香族炭化水素環基は、単環の芳香族炭化水素環基であってもよく、縮合環の芳香族炭化水素環基であってもよい。炭化水素環基の具体例としては、ジシクロペンタニル基、アダマンチル基、tert-ブチルシクロヘキシル基、イソボルニル基などが挙げられる。芳香族炭化水素環基としては、フェニル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。
[Repeating unit C]
The resin EP may contain a repeating unit containing a hydrocarbon ring group (hereinafter, also referred to as another repeating unit) as a repeating unit other than the repeating unit A and the repeating unit B. The hydrocarbon ring group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group. Further, the hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group or a polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group such as a fused ring or a crosslinked ring. Further, the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group of a fused ring. Specific examples of the hydrocarbon ring group include a dicyclopentanyl group, an adamantyl group, a tert-butylcyclohexyl group, an isobornyl group and the like. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
 樹脂EPは、脂肪族炭化水素環基を含む繰り返し単位と、芳香族炭化水素環基を含む繰り返し単位とをそれぞれ含むことが好ましい。この態様によれば、側鎖の嵩高さにより、樹脂が剛直になり、硬化膜の耐溶剤性が向上し、他色との混色がより抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。 The resin EP preferably contains a repeating unit containing an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group and a repeating unit containing an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group, respectively. According to this aspect, the bulkiness of the side chain makes the resin rigid, the solvent resistance of the cured film is improved, and it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is further suppressed.
 樹脂EPが繰り返し単位Cを含む場合、繰り返し単位Cの含有量は、樹脂EPの全繰り返し単位中0.1~40モル%であることが好ましい。上限は35モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、1モル%以上が好ましく、5モル%以上がより好ましい。
 また、樹脂EPが繰り返し単位Cとして脂肪族炭化水素環基を含む繰り返し単位と、芳香族炭化水素環基を含む繰り返し単位とをそれぞれ含む場合、樹脂EPは、脂肪族炭化水素環基を含む繰り返し単位の1モルに対して芳香族炭化水素環基を含む繰り返し単位を5~30モル含むことが好ましく、8~25モル含むことがより好ましく、10~20モル含むことが更に好ましい。この態様によれば、樹脂が剛直になり、硬化膜の耐溶剤性が向上し、他色との混色がより抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。
When the resin EP contains the repeating unit C, the content of the repeating unit C is preferably 0.1 to 40 mol% in all the repeating units of the resin EP. The upper limit is preferably 35 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit is preferably 1 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more.
When the resin EP contains a repeating unit containing an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group as the repeating unit C and a repeating unit containing an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group, the resin EP contains a repeating unit containing an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group. It is preferable that 1 mol of the unit contains 5 to 30 mol of the repeating unit containing an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group, more preferably 8 to 25 mol, and further preferably 10 to 20 mol. According to this aspect, the resin becomes rigid, the solvent resistance of the cured film is improved, and it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is further suppressed.
〔他の繰り返し単位〕
 樹脂EPは、上記繰り返し単位A、繰り返し単位B、および繰り返し単位C以外の繰り返し単位(以下、他の繰り返し単位ともいう)を含有していてもよい。他の繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂EPの全繰り返し単位中30モル%以下であることが好ましく、20モル%以下であることがより好ましく、10モル%以下であることが更に好ましい。
[Other repeating units]
The resin EP may contain a repeating unit other than the repeating unit A, the repeating unit B, and the repeating unit C (hereinafter, also referred to as another repeating unit). The content of the other repeating units is preferably 30 mol% or less, more preferably 20 mol% or less, still more preferably 10 mol% or less in all the repeating units of the resin EP.
(他の樹脂)
 本発明の着色組成物は、更に、上記樹脂EP以外の樹脂(以下、他の樹脂ともいう)を含むことができる。他の樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下が好ましく、500000以下がより好ましい。下限は、3000以上が好ましく、4000以上がより好ましく、5000以上が更に好ましい。
(Other resins)
The coloring composition of the present invention can further contain a resin other than the above resin EP (hereinafter, also referred to as another resin). The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the other resin is preferably 2000 to 2000000. The upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 3000 or more, more preferably 4000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more.
 他の樹脂としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、シロキサン樹脂などが挙げられる。また、上述した樹脂EP以外のエポキシ樹脂を用いることもできる。 Examples of other resins include (meth) acrylic resin, (meth) acrylamide resin, en-thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, and polyarylene ether. Examples thereof include phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin and siloxane resin. Further, an epoxy resin other than the resin EP described above can also be used.
 他の樹脂は、酸基を有する樹脂であることも好ましい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。酸基を有する樹脂はアルカリ可溶性樹脂や、分散剤として用いることもできる。酸基を有する樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、50mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下がさらに好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下がより更に好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the other resin is a resin having an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxy group and the like. The resin having an acid group can also be used as an alkali-soluble resin or a dispersant. The acid value of the resin having an acid group is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g. The lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and particularly preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
 酸基を有する樹脂は、マレイミド化合物に由来する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。マレイミド化合物としては、N-アルキルマレイミド、N-アリールマレイミドなどが挙げられる。マレイミド化合物に由来する繰り返し単位としては、式(C-mi)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
The resin having an acid group may have a repeating unit derived from a maleimide compound. Examples of the maleimide compound include N-alkylmaleimide and N-arylmaleimide. Examples of the repeating unit derived from the maleimide compound include a repeating unit represented by the formula (C-mi).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式(C-mi)において、Rmiはアルキル基またはアリール基を表す。アルキル基の炭素数は1~20が好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれもよい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。Rmiはアリール基であることが好ましい。 In the formula (C-mi), Rmi represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Rmi is preferably an aryl group.
 他の樹脂は、下記式(ED1)で示される化合物および/または下記式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。 The other resin is a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimer”). It is also preferable that the resin is contained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(ED1)中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。式(ED2)の具体例としては、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌できる。
In formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
In formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the formula (ED2), the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to.
 エーテルダイマーの具体例については、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0317を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 For a specific example of the ether dimer, paragraph number 0317 of JP2013-209760A can be referred to, and this content is incorporated in the present specification.
 他の樹脂は、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。重合性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基が挙げられる。 It is also preferable that the other resin is a resin containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
 他の樹脂は、式(III)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を含有することも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 式中、Rは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、R21およびR22はそれぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表し、nは0~15の整数を表す。R21およびR22が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましく、2または3であることが特に好ましい。nは0~5の整数であることが好ましく、0~4の整数であることがより好ましく、0~3の整数であることが更に好ましい。
The other resin preferably contains a resin containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
In the formula, R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 15. The alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, further preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms. preferable. n is preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
 式(III)で表される化合物としては、パラクミルフェノールのエチレンオキサイドまたはプロピレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、アロニックスM-110(東亞合成(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (III) include ethylene oxide of paracumylphenol or propylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate. Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
 他の樹脂は、分散剤であることも好ましい。分散剤としては、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上を占める樹脂が好ましく、実質的に酸基のみからなる樹脂がより好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、10~105mgKOH/gが好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミノ基が好ましい。 It is also preferable that the other resin is a dispersant. Examples of the dispersant include an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) and a basic dispersant (basic resin). Here, the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is larger than the amount of basic groups. As the acidic dispersant (acidic resin), a resin in which the amount of acid groups accounts for 70 mol% or more is preferable, and substantially, when the total amount of the amount of acid groups and the amount of basic groups is 100 mol%. A resin consisting only of an acid group is more preferable. The acid group of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group. The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH / g. Further, the basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is larger than the amount of acid groups. As the basic dispersant (basic resin), a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol% is preferable when the total amount of the amount of acid groups and the amount of basic groups is 100 mol%. The basic group contained in the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。分散剤として用いる樹脂が酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことにより、フォトリソグラフィ法によりパターン形成する際、現像残渣の発生をより抑制できる。 The resin used as the dispersant preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group. Since the resin used as the dispersant contains a repeating unit having an acid group, it is possible to further suppress the generation of development residue when forming a pattern by a photolithography method.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、グラフト樹脂であることも好ましい。グラフト樹脂の詳細は、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0025~0094の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant is a graft resin. For details of the graft resin, the description in paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP2012-255128A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に窒素原子を含むポリイミン系分散剤であることも好ましい。ポリイミン系分散剤としては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する部分構造を有する主鎖と、原子数40~10000の側鎖とを有し、かつ主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に塩基性窒素原子を有する樹脂が好ましい。塩基性窒素原子とは、塩基性を呈する窒素原子であれば特に制限はない。ポリイミン系分散剤については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0166の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant is a polyimine-based dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain. The polyimine-based dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group of pKa14 or less, a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and a basic nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain. The resin to have is preferable. The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a nitrogen atom exhibiting basicity. Regarding the polyimine-based dispersant, the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP2012-255128A can be referred to, and the content thereof is incorporated in the present specification.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂であることも好ましい。このような樹脂の具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant is a resin having a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core portion. Specific examples of such resins include the polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP2013-043962.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂の全繰り返し単位中10モル%以上であることが好ましく、10~80モル%であることがより好ましく、20~70モル%であることが更に好ましい。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain. The content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and 20 to 70 in all the repeating units of the resin. It is more preferably mol%.
 また、分散剤には、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載のポリエステル側鎖を有するポリエチレンイミン、国際公開第2019/125940号に記載のブロック共重合体、特開2020-066687号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、特開2020-066688号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマーなどを用いることもできる。 Further, as the dispersant, polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, and JP-A-2020-06667. Block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit, block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066688, and the like can also be used.
 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、ビックケミー社製のDisperbykシリーズ(例えば、Disperbyk-111、2001など)、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製のソルスパースシリーズ(例えば、ソルスパース20000、76500など)、味の素ファインテクノ(株)製のアジスパーシリーズ等が挙げられる。また、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0129に記載された製品、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0235に記載された製品を分散剤として用いることもできる。また、分散剤には、特開2017-206689号公報の段落0041~0060に記載の樹脂、特開2019-095548号公報に記載のヒンダードアミン4級塩を含む樹脂も好適に使用することができる。 Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include the Disperbyk series manufactured by Big Chemie (for example, Disperbyk-111, 2001, etc.) and the Solsparse series manufactured by Japan Lubrizol Co., Ltd. (for example, Disperserbyk series). For example, Solsparse 20000, 76500, etc.), Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd.'s Ajispar series and the like can be mentioned. Further, the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP2012-137564A and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP2017-194662 can also be used as a dispersant. Further, as the dispersant, the resin described in paragraphs 0041 to 0060 of JP-A-2017-206689 and the resin containing the hindered amine quaternary salt described in JP-A-2019-095548 can also be preferably used.
 樹脂の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中5~50質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、7.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましい。
 また、上述した樹脂EPの含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中5~50質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、7.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましい。
 また、着色組成物に含まれる樹脂中における上述した樹脂EPの含有量は、80~100質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、97.5質量%以下であることが好ましく、95質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、82.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、85質量%以上であることがより好ましい。
The content of the resin is preferably 5 to 50% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
The content of the above-mentioned resin EP is preferably 5 to 50% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
The content of the above-mentioned resin EP in the resin contained in the coloring composition is preferably 80 to 100% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 97.5% by mass or less, and more preferably 95% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 82.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 85% by mass or more.
<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を含有する。重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。本発明で用いられる重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性化合物であることが好ましい。
<< Polymerizable compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound. Examples of the polymerizable compound include compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. The polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
 重合性化合物としては、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマーなどの化学的形態のいずれであってもよいが、モノマーが好ましい。重合性化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましい。上限は、2000以下がより好ましく、1500以下が更に好ましい。下限は、150以上がより好ましく、250以上が更に好ましい。 The polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as a monomer, a prepolymer or an oligomer, but a monomer is preferable. The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000. The upper limit is more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1500 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 150 or more, and even more preferably 250 or more.
 重合性化合物のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基の含有量(以下、C=C価という)は、着色組成物の経時安定性の観点から2~14mmol/gであることが好ましい。下限は、3mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、4mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、5mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は12mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、10mmol/g以下であることがより好ましく、8mmol/g以下であることが更に好ましい。重合性化合物のC=C価は、重合性化合物の1分子中に含まれるエチレン性不飽和結合含有基の数を重合性化合物の分子量で割ることで算出した値である。 The content of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group (hereinafter referred to as C = C value) of the polymerizable compound is preferably 2 to 14 mmol / g from the viewpoint of the stability over time of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 3 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4 mmol / g or more, and further preferably 5 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is preferably 12 mmol / g or less, more preferably 10 mmol / g or less, and even more preferably 8 mmol / g or less. The C = C value of the polymerizable compound is a value calculated by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups contained in one molecule of the polymerizable compound by the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound.
 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3個以上含む化合物であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3~15個含む化合物であることがより好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3~6個含む化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましい。重合性化合物の具体例としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落番号0095~0108、特開2013-029760号公報の段落0227、特開2008-292970号公報の段落番号0254~0257、特開2013-253224号公報の段落番号0034~0038、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0477、特開2017-048367号公報、特許第6057891号公報、特許第6031807号公報、特開2017-194662号公報に記載されている化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 3 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and more preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond. It is more preferable that the compound contains 3 to 6 containing groups. Further, the polymerizable compound is preferably a (meth) acrylate compound having 3 to 15 functionalities, and more preferably a (meth) acrylate compound having 3 to 6 functionalities. Specific examples of the polymerizable compound include paragraph numbers 0995 to 0108 of JP2009-288705, paragraphs 0227 of JP2013-029760, paragraphs 0254 to 0257 of JP2008-292970, and JP-A. 2013-253224, Paragraph Nos. 0034 to 0038, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-208494, Paragraph Nos. 0477, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-048637, Japanese Patent No. 6057891, Japanese Patent No. 6031807, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-194662. Examples include the compounds described in the publication, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬(株)製、NKエステルA-DPH-12E;新中村化学工業(株)製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコールおよび/またはプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造の化合物(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)が好ましい。また、重合性化合物としては、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはM-460;東亞合成製)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、NKエステルA-TMMT)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(日本化薬(株)製、KAYARAD HDDA)、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、NKオリゴUA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)などを用いることもできる。 Examples of the polymerizable compound include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-320; Nihon Kayaku Co., Ltd.). ), Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku) NK Ester A-DPH-12E, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., and the structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are bonded via ethylene glycol and / or propylene glycol residues. Compounds (eg, SR454, SR499, commercially available from Sartmer) are preferred. As the polymerizable compound, diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth) acrylate (commercially available M-460; manufactured by Toa Synthetic), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., NK ester A) -TMMT), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA), RP-1040 (manufactured by Nihon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.) , NK Oligo UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), light acrylate POB-A0 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), etc. You can also.
 重合性化合物としては、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンプロピレンオキシ変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンエチレンオキシ変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸エチレンオキシ変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレートなどの3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物を用いることも好ましい。3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-309、M-310、M-321、M-350、M-360、M-313、M-315、M-306、M-305、M-303、M-452、M-450(東亞合成(株)製)、NKエステル A9300、A-GLY-9E、A-GLY-20E、A-TMM-3、A-TMM-3L、A-TMM-3LM-N、A-TMPT、TMPT(新中村化学工業(株)製)、KAYARAD GPO-303、TMPTA、THE-330、TPA-330、PET-30(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the polymerizable compound include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane propyleneoxy-modified tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethyleneoxy-modified tri (meth) acrylate, and isocyanuric acid ethyleneoxy-modified tri (meth) acrylate. It is also preferable to use a trifunctional (meth) acrylate compound such as pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate. Commercially available trifunctional (meth) acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306, and M-305. , M-303, M-452, M-450 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.), NK ester A9300, A-GLY-9E, A-GLY-20E, A-TMM-3, A-TMM-3L, A -TMM-3LM-N, A-TMPT, TMPT (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD GPO-303, TMPTA, THE-330, TPA-330, PET-30 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) And so on.
 重合性化合物としては、酸基を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。酸基を有する重合性化合物を用いることで、現像時に未露光部の着色組成物が除去されやすく、現像残渣の発生を抑制できる。酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基等が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸基を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-305、M-510、M-520、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)等が挙げられる。酸基を有する重合性化合物の好ましい酸価としては、0.1~40mgKOH/gであり、より好ましくは5~30mgKOH/gである。重合性化合物の酸価が0.1mgKOH/g以上であれば、現像液に対する溶解性が良好であり、40mgKOH/g以下であれば、製造や取扱い上、有利である。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having an acid group can also be used. By using a polymerizable compound having an acid group, the colored composition in the unexposed portion can be easily removed during development, and the generation of development residue can be suppressed. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group and the like, and a carboxy group is preferable. Examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having an acid group include Aronix M-305, M-510, M-520, and Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.). The preferable acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, and more preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. When the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the solubility in a developing solution is good, and when the acid value is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling.
 重合性化合物としては、カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20、DPCA-30、DPCA-60、DPCA-120等が挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used. The polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and examples thereof include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120.
 重合性化合物としては、アルキレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。アルキレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物は、エチレンオキシ基および/またはプロピレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物が好ましく、エチレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物がより好ましく、エチレンオキシ基を4~20個有する3~6官能(メタ)アクリレート化合物がさらに好ましい。アルキレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、KAYARAD RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group can also be used. As the polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group, a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group and / or a propyleneoxy group is preferable, a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group is more preferable, and 3 to 3 having 4 to 20 ethyleneoxy groups. A hexafunctional (meth) acrylate compound is more preferred. Examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group include KAYARAD RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物としては、フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、オグソールEA-0200、EA-0300(大阪ガスケミカル(株)製、フルオレン骨格を有する(メタ)アクリレートモノマー)などが挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used. Examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., a (meth) acrylate monomer having a fluorene skeleton).
 重合性化合物としては、トルエンなどの環境規制物質を実質的に含まない化合物を用いることも好ましい。このような化合物の市販品としては、KAYARAD DPHA LT、KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, it is also preferable to use a compound that does not substantially contain an environmentally regulatory substance such as toluene. Examples of commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT and KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物としては、特公昭48-041708号公報、特開昭51-037193号公報、特公平02-032293号公報、特公平02-016765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-049860号公報、特公昭56-017654号公報、特公昭62-039417号公報、特公昭62-039418号公報に記載されたエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物も好適である。また、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平01-105238号公報に記載された分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する重合性化合物を用いることも好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、UA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600、LINC-202UA(共栄社化学(株)製)などの市販品を用いることもできる。 Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-041708, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-037193, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 02-0322293, and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 02-016765. Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-based skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-049860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-017654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039418 are also suitable. Further, it is also preferable to use a polymerizable compound having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A No. 01-105238. The polymerizable compounds are UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, Commercially available products such as T-600, AI-600, and LINK-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
 重合性化合物の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中5.0~35質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、30質量%以下であることが好ましく、25質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、7.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 5.0 to 35% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 25% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は光重合開始剤を含有する。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<< Photopolymerization Initiator >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
 光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物などが挙げられる。光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物および3-アリール置換クマリン化合物であることが好ましく、オキシム化合物、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物から選ばれる化合物であることがより好ましく、オキシム化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、光重合開始剤としては、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, and thio compounds. , Ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, hydroxyalkylphenone compounds, aminoalkylphenone compounds and the like. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, the photopolymerization initiator is a trihalomethyltriazine compound, a benzyldimethylketal compound, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound, an acylphosphine compound, a phosphine oxide compound, a metallocene compound, an oxime compound, or a triarylimidazole dimer. , Onium compound, benzothiazole compound, benzophenone compound, acetophenone compound, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex, halomethyloxadiazole compound and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compound, preferably oxime compound, hydroxyalkylphenone compound, amino. A compound selected from an alkylphenone compound and an acylphosphine compound is more preferable, and an oxime compound is further preferable. Further, as the photopolymerization initiator, the compound described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173 and JP-A-6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37-60p, vol. 19, No. 3, 2019 Peroxide-based Photopolymerization Initiator, International Publication No. 2018/221177, Photopolymerization Initiator, International Publication No. 2018/110179, Photopolymerization Initiator, JP-A-2019-043864. Examples thereof include the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-044030, the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-167313, and the contents thereof are described in the present invention. Incorporated in the specification.
 アミノアルキルフェノン化合物としては、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアルキルフェノン化合物が挙げられる。また、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 907、Irgacure 369、Irgacure 369E、Irgacure 379EG(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the aminoalkylphenone compound include the aminoalkylphenone compound described in JP-A No. 10-291969. Commercially available products of aminoalkylphenone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (above, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgure 369, Ir. BASF) and the like.
 アシルホスフィン化合物としては、特許第4225898号公報に記載のアシルホスフィン化合物などが挙げられる。具体例としては、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルホスフィンオキサイドなどが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 819、Omnirad TPO(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 819、Irgacure TPO(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the acylphosphine compound include the acylphosphine compound described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898. Specific examples include bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide. Examples of commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (above, manufactured by IGM Resins BV), Irgacure 819, and Irgacure TPO (above, manufactured by BASF).
 ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物としては、下記式(V)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
式(V)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式中Rvは、置換基を表し、RvおよびRvは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RvとRvとが互いに結合して環を形成していてもよく、mは0~5の整数を表す。
Examples of the hydroxyalkylphenone compound include compounds represented by the following formula (V).
Equation (V)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
In the formula, Rv 1 represents a substituent, Rv 2 and Rv 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and Rv 2 and Rv 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. m represents an integer from 0 to 5.
 Rvが表す置換基としては、アルキル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~10のアルキル基)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基)が挙げられる。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。Rvが表すアルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基や、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する基などが挙げられる。ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する基としては、式(V)におけるRvが結合したベンゼン環またはRvから水素原子を1個除去した構造の基が挙げられる。 Examples of the substituent represented by Rv 1 include an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) and an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms). The alkyl group and the alkoxy group are preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group and alkoxy group represented by Rv 1 may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and a group having a hydroxyalkylphenone structure. Examples of the group having a hydroxyalkylphenone structure include a benzene ring to which Rv 1 is bonded in the formula (V) or a group having a structure in which one hydrogen atom is removed from Rv 1 .
 RvおよびRvにおける、置換基としては、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基)が好ましい。また、RvとRvは互いに結合して環(好ましくは炭素数4~8の環、より好ましくは、炭素数4~8の脂肪族環)を形成していてもよい。アルキル基は、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。 As the substituent in Rv 2 and Rv 3 , an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable. Further, Rv 2 and Rv 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring (preferably a ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably an aliphatic ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms). The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
 式(V)で表される化合物の具体例としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (V) include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 184、Irgacure 1173、Irgacure 2959、Irgacure 127(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available hydroxyalkylphenone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (above, IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 1173, Irgar Made) and so on.
 オキシム化合物としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0038に記載の化合物、国際公開第2013/167515号に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、及び2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、Irgacure OXE01、Irgacure OXE02、Irgacure OXE03、Irgacure OXE04(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919(ADEKA社製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物や、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-930(以上、ADEKA社製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the oxime compound include the compound described in JP-A-2001-233842, the compound described in JP-A-2000-080068, the compound described in JP-A-2006-342166, and J. Am. C. S. The compound according to Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660), J. Mol. C. S. The compound described in Perkin II (1979, pp. 156-162), the compound described in Journal of Photopolisr Science and Technology (1995, pp. 202-232), the compound described in JP-A-2000-066385, the compound described in JP-A-2000-066385. Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2017-109766, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6065596, compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/152153, International Publication No. 2017. The compound described in / 051680, the compound described in JP-A-2017-198865, the compound described in paragraphs 0025 to 0038 of International Publication No. 2017/164127, the compound described in International Publication No. 2013/167515, etc. Can be mentioned. Specific examples of the oxime compound include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminovtan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, and the like. 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropane-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropane-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutane-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy Examples thereof include imino-1-phenylpropane-1-one. Commercially available products include Irgacure OXE01, Irgacure OXE02, Irgacure OXE03, Irgacure OXE04 (above, manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), and ADEKA Corporation. , The photopolymerization initiator 2) described in JP-A-2012-014052. Further, as the oxime compound, it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property or a compound having high transparency and hardly discoloring. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARKULS NCI-730, NCI-831, and NCI-930 (all manufactured by ADEKA).
 光重合開始剤としては、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2014-137466号公報に記載の化合物、特許6636081号公報に記載の化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2016-0109444号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include the compound described in JP-A-2014-137466, the compound described in Japanese Patent No. 6636081, and the compound described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2016-0109444. Will be.
 光重合開始剤としては、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。そのようなオキシム化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2013/083505号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of the carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can also be used. Specific examples of such an oxime compound include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/083505.
 光重合開始剤としては、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を含むオキシム化合物は、式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。
(OX-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 式(OX-1)において、ArおよびArは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素環を表し、Rは、フッ素原子を含む基を有するアリール基を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used. The oxime compound containing a fluorine atom is preferably a compound represented by the formula (OX-1).
(OX-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
In the formula (OX-1), Ar 1 and Ar 2 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, and R 1 is an aryl group having a group containing a fluorine atom. Representing R 2 and R 3 independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group, respectively.
 式(OX-1)のArおよびArが表す芳香族炭化水素環は、単環でもよく、縮合環であってもよい。芳香族炭化水素環の環を構成する炭素原子数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が特に好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環は、ベンゼン環およびナフタレン環が好ましい。なかでも、Arはベンゼン環であることが好ましい。Arがベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ナフタレン環であることがより好ましい。 The aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 1 and Ar 2 in the formula (OX-1) may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and particularly preferably 6 to 10. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring. Of these, Ar 1 is preferably a benzene ring. Ar 2 is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and more preferably a naphthalene ring.
 ArおよびArが有してもよい置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、ハロゲン原子、-ORX1、-SRX1、-CORX1、-COORX1、-OCORX1、-NRX1X2、-NHCORX1、-CONRX1X2、-NHCONRX1X2、-NHCOORX1、-SOX1、-SOORX1、-NHSOX1などが挙げられる。RX1およびRX2は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。
 ハロゲン原子は、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子などが挙げられ、フッ素原子が好ましい。置換基としてのアルキル基、ならびに、RX1およびRX2が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アルキル基は、水素原子の一部または全部がハロゲン原子(好ましくは、フッ素原子)で置換されていてもよい。また、アルキル基は、水素原子の一部または全部が、上記置換基で置換されていてもよい。置換基としてのアリール基、ならびに、RX1およびRX2が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。アリール基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。また、アリール基は、水素原子の一部または全部が、上記置換基で置換されていてもよい。置換基としてのヘテロ環基、ならびに、RX1およびRX2が表すヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。ヘテロ環基を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がより好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。また、ヘテロ環基は、水素原子の一部または全部が、上記置換基で置換されていてもよい。
Substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a halogen atom, -OR X1 , -SR X1 , -COR X1 , and -COOR X1 . , -OCOR X1 , -NR X1 R X2 , -NHCOR X1 , -CONR X1 R X2 , -NHCONR X1 R X2 , -NHCOOR X1 , -SO 2 R X1 , -SO 2 OR X1 , -NHSO 2 R X1 etc. Can be mentioned. RX1 and RX2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is preferable. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group as a substituent and the alkyl group represented by RX1 and RX2 is preferably 1 to 30. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred. The alkyl group may be partially or wholly substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom). Further, in the alkyl group, a part or all of hydrogen atoms may be substituted with the above-mentioned substituent. The aryl group as a substituent and the aryl group represented by RX1 and RX2 preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. Further, the aryl group may have a part or all of hydrogen atoms substituted with the above-mentioned substituents. The heterocyclic group as a substituent and the heterocyclic group represented by RX1 and RX2 are preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. The number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and even more preferably 3 to 12. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. Further, in the heterocyclic group, a part or all of hydrogen atoms may be substituted with the above-mentioned substituent.
 Arが表す芳香族炭化水素環は、無置換の芳香族炭化水素環であることが好ましい。Arが表す芳香族炭化水素環は、置換基を有していることが好ましい。置換基としては、-CORX1が好ましい。RX1は、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基が好ましく、アリール基がより好ましい。アリール基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基などが挙げられる。 The aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 1 is preferably an unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 2 preferably has a substituent. As the substituent, -COR X1 is preferable. RX1 is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, more preferably an aryl group. The aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
 式(OX-1)のRは、フッ素原子を含む基を有するアリール基を表す。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。フッ素原子を含む基は、フッ素原子を有するアルキル基(以下、含フッ素アルキル基ともいう)、および、フッ素原子を有するアルキル基を含む基(以下、含フッ素基ともいう)であることが好ましい。含フッ素基としては、-ORF1、-SRF1、-CORF1、-COORF1、-OCORF1、-NRF1F2、-NHCORF1、-CONRF1F2、-NHCONRF1F2、-NHCOORF1、-SOF1、-SOORF1および-NHSOF1から選ばれる少なくとも1つの基が好ましい。RF1は、含フッ素アルキル基を表し、RF2は、水素原子、アルキル基、含フッ素アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。含フッ素基は、-ORF1が好ましい。 R 1 of the formula (OX-1) represents an aryl group having a group containing a fluorine atom. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The group containing a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom (hereinafter, also referred to as a fluorine-containing alkyl group) and a group containing an alkyl group having a fluorine atom (hereinafter, also referred to as a fluorine-containing group). The fluorine-containing groups include -OR F1 , -SR F1 , -COR F1 , -COOR F1 , -OCOR F1 , -NR F1 R F2 , -NHCOR F1 , -CONR F1 R F2 , -NHCONR F1 R F2 , and -NHCOOR. At least one group selected from F1 , -SO 2 R F1 , -SO 2 OR F1 and -NHSO 2 R F1 is preferred. RF1 represents a fluorine-containing alkyl group, and RF2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a fluorine-containing alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. The fluorine-containing group is preferably -OR F1 .
 RF1およびRF2が表す含フッ素アルキル基、並びにRF2が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましく、1~4が特に好ましい。含フッ素アルキル基およびアルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。含フッ素アルキル基において、フッ素原子の置換率は40~100%であることが好ましく、50~100%であることがより好ましく、60~100%であることがさらに好ましい。なお、フッ素原子の置換率とは、アルキル基が有する全水素原子の数に対してフッ素原子に置換されている数の比率(%)をいう。 The fluorine-containing alkyl group represented by RF1 and RF2 and the alkyl group represented by RF2 preferably have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, further preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. .. The fluorine-containing alkyl group and the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferable. In the fluorine-containing alkyl group, the substitution rate of the fluorine atom is preferably 40 to 100%, more preferably 50 to 100%, still more preferably 60 to 100%. The substitution rate of fluorine atoms means the ratio (%) of the number of substitutions to fluorine atoms to the number of total hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group.
 RF2が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。 The aryl group represented by RF2 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 RF2が表すヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。縮合数は、2~8が好ましく、2~6がより好ましく、3~5が更に好ましく、3~4が特に好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成する炭素原子の数は3~40が好ましく、3~30がより好ましく、3~20がより好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましく、窒素原子がより好ましい。 The heterocyclic group represented by RF2 is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. The number of condensations is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 6, further preferably 3 to 5, and particularly preferably 3 to 4. The number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 40, more preferably 3 to 30, and even more preferably 3 to 20. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the hetero ring group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and more preferably a nitrogen atom.
 フッ素原子を含む基は、式(1)または(2)で表される末端構造を有することが好ましい。式中の*は、連結手を表す。
*-CHF   (1)*-CF   (2)
The group containing a fluorine atom preferably has a terminal structure represented by the formula (1) or (2). * In the formula represents a connecting hand.
* -CHF 2 (1) * -CF 3 (2)
 式(OX-1)のRは、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基およびアリール基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。
置換基としては、上述したArおよびArが有してもよい置換基で説明した置換基が挙げられる。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましく、1~4が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。
R 2 of the formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group and the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the above-mentioned substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 15, further preferably 1 to 10, and particularly preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 式(OX-1)のRは、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基およびアリール基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。
置換基としては、上述したArおよびArが有してもよい置換基で説明した置換基が挙げられる。Rが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。Rが表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。
R 3 of the formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group and the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the above-mentioned substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R 3 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 15, and even more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred. The aryl group represented by R 3 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報に記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報に記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報に記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom are described in the compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36-40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471. Compound (C-3) and the like can be mentioned.
 光重合開始剤としては、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物を用いることができる。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物は、二量体とすることも好ましい。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-114249号公報の段落番号0031~0047、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0008~0012、0070~0079に記載されている化合物、特許4223071号公報の段落番号0007~0025に記載されている化合物、アデカアークルズNCI-831(ADEKA社製)が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used. The oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include the compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A and paragraphs 0008-0012 and 0070-0079 of JP-A-2014-137466. Examples thereof include the compound described in paragraphs 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071, ADEKA ARKULS NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA).
 光重合開始剤としては、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/036910号に記載されているOE-01~OE-75が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used. Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in International Publication No. 2015/036910.
 光重合開始剤としては、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。このような光重合開始剤としては国際公開第2019/088055号に記載された化合物などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxy group is bonded to the carbazole skeleton can also be used. Examples of such a photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055.
 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the oxime compound preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 本発明では、光重合開始剤として、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤A1と、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以下で、かつ、波長254nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤A2と、を併用することが好ましい。この態様によれば、露光によって着色組成物を十分に硬化させやすく、低温プロセス(例えば全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度、好ましくは120℃以下の温度)にて、平坦性が良好で、かつ、耐溶剤性などの特性にも優れた硬化膜を形成することができる。光重合開始剤A1および光重合開始剤A2としては、上述した化合物のなかから上記の吸光係数を有する化合物を選択して用いることが好ましい。 In the present invention, as the photopolymerization initiator, the photopolymerization initiator A1 having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more in methanol and the extinction coefficient of 365 nm in methanol are 1. It is preferable to use in combination with the photopolymerization initiator A2 having an extinction coefficient of 0 × 10 2 mL / g cm or less and a wavelength of 254 nm of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more. According to this aspect, the coloring composition is easily cured sufficiently by exposure, has good flatness in a low temperature process (for example, a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower, preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower throughout the whole process), and has good flatness. It is possible to form a cured film having excellent properties such as solvent resistance. As the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2, it is preferable to select and use a compound having the above-mentioned extinction coefficient from the above-mentioned compounds.
 なお、本発明において、光重合開始剤の上記波長における吸光係数は、以下のようにして測定した値である。すなわち、光重合開始剤をメタノールに溶解させて測定溶液を調製し、前述の測定溶液の吸光度を測定することで算出した。具体的には、前述の測定溶液を幅1cmのガラスセルに入れ、Agilent Technologies社製UV-Vis-NIRスペクトルメーター(Cary5000)を用いて吸光度を測定し、下記式に当てはめて、波長365nmおよび波長254nmにおける吸光係数(mL/gcm)を算出した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000022
 上記式においてεは吸光係数(mL/gcm)、Aは吸光度、cは光重合開始剤の濃度(g/mL)、lは光路長(cm)を表す。
In the present invention, the absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator at the above wavelength is a value measured as follows. That is, it was calculated by dissolving the photopolymerization initiator in methanol to prepare a measurement solution and measuring the absorbance of the above-mentioned measurement solution. Specifically, the above-mentioned measurement solution was placed in a glass cell having a width of 1 cm, and the absorbance was measured using a UV-Vis-NIR spectrum meter (Cary5000) manufactured by Agilent Technologies. The absorbance coefficient (mL / gcm) at 254 nm was calculated.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000022
In the above formula, ε represents the extinction coefficient (mL / gcm), A represents the absorbance, c represents the concentration of the photopolymerization initiator (g / mL), and l represents the optical path length (cm).
 光重合開始剤A1のメタノール中での波長365nmにおける吸光係数は、1.0×10mL/gcm以上であり、1.0×10mL/gcm以上であることが好ましく、1.1×10mL/gcm以上であることがより好ましく、1.2×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが更に好ましく、1.3×10~5.0×10mL/gcmであることがより一層好ましく、1.5×10~3.0×10mL/gcmであることが特に好ましい。
 また、光重合開始剤A1のメタノール中での波長254nmの光の吸光係数は、1.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、1.5×10~9.5×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましく、3.0×10~8.0×10mL/gcmであることが更に好ましい。
The absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator A1 in methanol at a wavelength of 365 nm is 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more, preferably 1.0 × 10 4 mL / g cm or more, preferably 1.1 ×. It is more preferably 10 4 mL / g cm or more, further preferably 1.2 × 10 4 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / g cm, and 1.3 × 10 4 to 5.0 × 10 4 mL. It is even more preferably / gcm, and particularly preferably 1.5 × 10 4 to 3.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm.
The absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator A1 in methanol at a wavelength of 254 nm is preferably 1.0 × 10 4 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / g cm, preferably 1.5 × 10 4 to. It is more preferably 9.5 × 10 4 mL / gcm, and even more preferably 3.0 × 10 4 to 8.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm.
 光重合開始剤A1としては、オキシム化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物が好ましく、オキシム化合物およびアシルホスフィン化合物がより好ましく、オキシム化合物が更に好ましく、組成物に含まれる他の成分との相溶性の観点からフッ素原子を含むオキシム化合物であることが特に好ましい。光重合開始剤A1の具体例としては、1,2-オクタンジオン,1-[4-(フェニルチオ)-,2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)](市販品としては、例えば、Irgacure OXE01、BASF社製)、エタノン,1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(O-アセチルオキシム)(市販品としては、例えば、Irgacure OXE02、BASF社製)、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルホスフィンオキサイド(市販品としては、例えば、Omnirad 819(IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 819(BASF社製))、上記のオキシム化合物の具体例で示した(C-13)、(C-14)などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator A1, an oxime compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, an oxime compound and an acylphosphine compound are more preferable, an oxime compound is further preferable, and compatibility with other components contained in the composition. From the viewpoint of the above, it is particularly preferable that the oxime compound contains a fluorine atom. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator A1 include 1,2-octanedione, 1- [4- (phenylthio)-, 2- (O-benzoyloxime)] (commercially available products include, for example, Irgure OXE01, BASF). , Etanon, 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl]-, 1- (O-acetyloxime) (commercially available products include, for example, Irgacure OXE02, BASF), bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (commercially available products include, for example, Omnirad 819 (IGM Resins BV), Irgacure 819 (BASF)), Examples thereof include (C-13) and (C-14) shown in the above-mentioned specific examples of the oxime compound.
 光重合開始剤A2のメタノール中での波長365nmの光の吸光係数は、1.0×10mL/gcm以下であり、10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、20~1.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましい。また、光重合開始剤A1のメタノール中での波長365nmの光の吸光係数と、光重合開始剤A2のメタノール中での波長365nmの光の吸光係数との差は、9.0×10mL/gcm以上であり、1.0×10mL/gcm以上であることが好ましく、5.0×10~3.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましく、1.0×10~2.0×10mL/gcmであることが更に好ましい。また、光重合開始剤A2のメタノール中での波長254nmの光の吸光係数は、1.0×10mL/gcm以上であり、1.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、5.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましい。 The extinction coefficient of the light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 1.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm or less, preferably 10 to 1.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm, 20 More preferably, it is ~ 1.0 × 10 2 mL / g cm. The difference between the absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the absorption coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 9.0 × 10 2 mL. It is / gcm or more, preferably 1.0 × 10 3 mL / gcm or more, more preferably 5.0 × 10 3 to 3.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm, and more preferably 1.0 × 10 It is more preferably 4 to 2.0 × 10 4 mL / g cm. The absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator A2 in methanol at a wavelength of 254 nm is 1.0 × 10 3 mL / gcm or more, and 1.0 × 10 3 to 1.0 × 10 6 mL / gcm. It is preferably 5.0 × 10 3 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / g cm.
 光重合開始剤A2としては、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物、フェニルグリオキシレート化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物が好ましく、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物およびフェニルグリオキシレート化合物がより好ましく、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物が更に好ましい。また、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物としては、上述した式(V)で表される化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤A2の具体例としては、1-ヒドロキシ-シクロヘキシル-フェニル-ケトン(市販品としては、例えば、Omnirad 184(IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 184(BASF社製))、1-[4-(2-ヒドロキシエトキシ)-フェニル]-2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-プロパン-1-オン(市販品としては、例えば、Omnirad 2959(IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 2959(BASF社製))などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator A2, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound, a phenylglioxylate compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound and a phenylglycilate compound are more preferable, and a hydroxyalkylphenone compound is further preferable. preferable. Further, as the hydroxyalkylphenone compound, the compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (V) is preferable. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator A2 include 1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone (commercially available products include, for example, Omnirad 184 (IGM Resins BV), Irgure 184 (BASF)). 1- [4- (2-Hydroxyethoxy) -phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-propane-1-one (As a commercial product, for example, Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins BV). , Irgacure 2959 (manufactured by BASF) and the like.
 光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2との組み合わせとしては、光重合開始剤A1がオキシム化合物であり、光重合開始剤A2がヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物である組み合わせが好ましく、光重合開始剤A1がオキシム化合物であり、光重合開始剤A2が上述した式(V)で表される化合物である組み合わせがより好ましく、光重合開始剤A1がフッ素原子を含むオキシム化合物であり、光重合開始剤A2が上述した式(V)で表される化合物である組み合わせが特に好ましい。 As a combination of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2, a combination in which the photopolymerization initiator A1 is an oxime compound and the photopolymerization initiator A2 is a hydroxyalkylphenone compound is preferable, and the photopolymerization initiator A1 is A combination of an oxime compound in which the photopolymerization initiator A2 is a compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (V) is more preferable, the photopolymerization initiator A1 is an oxime compound containing a fluorine atom, and the photopolymerization initiator A2 is A combination of the compounds represented by the above formula (V) is particularly preferable.
 光重合開始剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~17.5質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、1.0質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、15.0質量%以下であることが好ましく、12.5質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10.0質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物100質量部に対して光重合開始剤を1.0~50質量部含有することが好ましい。上限は、40質量部以下であることが好ましく、30質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、2.5質量部以上であることが好ましく、5.0質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。この態様によれば、現像後のパターン形状が良好である。
The content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 17.5% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 1.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 15.0% by mass or less, more preferably 12.5% by mass or less, and further preferably 10.0% by mass or less.
Further, the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains 1.0 to 50 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound. The upper limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 30 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 2.5 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 5.0 parts by mass or more. According to this aspect, the pattern shape after development is good.
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述した光重合開始剤A1を用いた場合、光重合開始剤A1の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~17.5質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、1.0質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、15.0質量%以下であることが好ましく、12.5質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10.0質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 When the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator A1 is used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the content of the photopolymerization initiator A1 is 0.1 to 17.5 in the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably by mass%. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 1.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 15.0% by mass or less, more preferably 12.5% by mass or less, and further preferably 10.0% by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述した光重合開始剤A2を用いた場合、光重合開始剤A2の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~10.0質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、1.0質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、9.0質量%以下であることが好ましく、8.0質量%以下であることがより好ましく、7.0質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 When the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator A2 is used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the content of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 0.1 to 10.0 in the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably by mass%. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 1.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 9.0% by mass or less, more preferably 8.0% by mass or less, and further preferably 7.0% by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述した光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2とを用いた場合、本発明の着色組成物は、光重合開始剤A1の100質量部に対して、光重合開始剤A2を50~200質量部含有することが好ましい。上限は、175質量部以下であることが好ましく、150質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、60質量部以上であることが好ましく、70質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。この態様によれば、低温プロセス(例えば全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度、好ましくは120℃以下の温度)にて耐溶剤性などの特性に優れた硬化膜を形成することができる。 When the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator A1 and photopolymerization initiator A2 are used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the coloring composition of the present invention comprises 100 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator A1. On the other hand, it is preferable to contain 50 to 200 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator A2. The upper limit is preferably 175 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 150 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 60 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 70 parts by mass or more. According to this aspect, a cured film having excellent properties such as solvent resistance can be formed in a low temperature process (for example, a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower, preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process).
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述した光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2とを用いた場合、着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2との合計の含有量は、0.1~20.0質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、1.0質量%以上であることが好ましく、2.0質量%以上であることがより好ましく、2.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、17.5質量%以下であることが好ましく、15.0質量%以下であることがより好ましく、12.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 When the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator A1 and photopolymerization initiator A2 are used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition are used. The total content with the agent A2 is preferably 0.1 to 20.0% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 1.0% by mass or more, more preferably 2.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 2.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 17.5% by mass or less, more preferably 15.0% by mass or less, and further preferably 12.5% by mass or less.
<<フリル基含有化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、フリル基を含む化合物(以下、フリル基含有化合物ともいう)を含有することができる。この態様によれば、低温硬化に優れた着色組成物とすることができる。
<< Frill group-containing compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a compound containing a frill group (hereinafter, also referred to as a frill group-containing compound). According to this aspect, a coloring composition excellent in low temperature curing can be obtained.
 フリル基含有化合物は、フリル基(フランから1つの水素原子を除いた基)を含んでいれば特にその構造が限定されるものではない。フリル基含有化合物については、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0049~0089に記載された化合物を用いることができる。また、特開2000-233581号公報、特開1994-271558号公報、特開1994-293830号公報、特開1996-239421号公報、特開1998-508655号公報、特開2000-001529号公報、特開2003-183348号公報、特開2006-193628号公報、特開2007-186684号公報、特開2010-265377号公報、特開2011-170069号公報などに記載されている化合物を用いることもできる。 The structure of the frill group-containing compound is not particularly limited as long as it contains a frill group (a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from furan). As the frill group-containing compound, the compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0089 of JP-A-2017-194662 can be used. Further, JP-A-2000-233581, JP-A-1994-271558, JP-A-1994-293830, JP-A-1996-239421, JP-A-1998-508655, JP-A-2000-001529, Compounds described in JP-A-2003-183348, JP-A-2006-193628, JP-A-2007-186648, JP-A-2010-265377, JP-A-2011-170069, etc. may also be used. can.
 フリル基含有化合物は、モノマーであってもよく、ポリマーであってもよい。得られる膜の耐久性を向上させやすいという理由からポリマーであることが好ましい。ポリマーの場合、重量平均分子量は、2000~70000が好ましい。上限は、60000以下が好ましく、50000以下がより好ましい。下限は、3000以上が好ましく、4000以上がより好ましく、5000以上が更に好ましい。なお、ポリマータイプのフリル基含有化合物は、本発明の着色組成物における樹脂にも該当する成分である。 The frill group-containing compound may be a monomer or a polymer. A polymer is preferable because it is easy to improve the durability of the obtained film. In the case of a polymer, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 2000 to 70000. The upper limit is preferably 60,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 3000 or more, more preferably 4000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more. The polymer-type frill group-containing compound is also a component corresponding to the resin in the coloring composition of the present invention.
 フリル基含有化合物の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~70質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、5.0質量%以上であることがより好ましく、7.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下であることが好ましく、60質量%以下であることがより好ましく、50質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。フリル基含有化合物は、1種単独であってもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the frill group-containing compound is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is preferably 2.5% by mass or more, more preferably 5.0% by mass or more, and further preferably 7.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 65% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less. The frill group-containing compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, the total amount is preferably in the above range.
<<溶剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。溶剤としては、有機溶剤が挙げられる。溶剤は、各成分の溶解性や着色組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はない。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落0223を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤を好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、3-ペンタノン、4-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、2-メチルシクロヘキサノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、シクロヘプタノン、シクロオクタノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、3-メトキシブタノール、メチルエチルケトン、ガンマブチロラクトン、スルホラン、アニソール、1,4-ジアセトキシブタン、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセタート、二酢酸ブタン-1,3-ジイル、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセタート、ジアセトンアルコールなどが挙げられる。ただし有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
<< Solvent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. Examples of the solvent include organic solvents. The solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the coloring composition. Examples of the organic solvent include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, hydrocarbon-based solvents and the like. For these details, paragraph 0223 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Further, an ester solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and a ketone solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used. Specific examples of the organic solvent include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -Heptanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethylcarbitol acetate, butylcarbi Tall acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N, N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N, N-dimethylpropanamide, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxybutanol, methylethylketone, Gamma butyrolactone, sulfolane, anisole, 1,4-diacetoxybutane, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, butane diacetate-1,3-diyl, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, diacetone alcohol and the like can be mentioned. However, aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may need to be reduced for environmental reasons (for example, 50 parts by mass (parts) with respect to the total amount of organic solvent. Per millision) or less, 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
 本発明において、溶剤を効率よく揮発させる観点から、溶剤としては、沸点が160℃以下の有機溶剤であることが好ましい。有機溶剤の沸点は、140℃以下であることがより好ましく、130℃以下であることがさらに好ましい。沸点の下限は、特に制限されないが、例えば100℃以上であることが好ましい。このような有機溶剤としては、例えば酢酸ブチル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、シクロヘキサノン、乳酸エチルなどが挙げられ、酢酸ブチル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートが好ましい。 In the present invention, from the viewpoint of efficiently volatilizing the solvent, the solvent is preferably an organic solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or lower. The boiling point of the organic solvent is more preferably 140 ° C. or lower, further preferably 130 ° C. or lower. The lower limit of the boiling point is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 ° C. or higher, for example. Examples of such an organic solvent include butyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, cyclohexanone, ethyl lactate and the like, and butyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate are preferable.
 本発明においては、金属含有量の少ない溶剤を用いることが好ましく、溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような高純度溶剤は例えば東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 In the present invention, it is preferable to use a solvent having a low metal content, and the metal content of the solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per parts) or less. If necessary, a solvent at the mass ppt (parts per trillion) level may be used, and such a high-purity solvent is provided by, for example, Toyo Synthetic Co., Ltd. (The Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).
 溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下がさらに好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、ポリエチレンまたはナイロンが好ましい。 Examples of the method for removing impurities such as metals from the solvent include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter pore diameter of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, and even more preferably 3 μm or less. The filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
 溶剤は、異性体(原子数が同じであるが構造が異なる化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The solvent may contain isomers (compounds having the same number of atoms but different structures). Further, only one kind of isomer may be contained, or a plurality of kinds may be contained.
 本発明において、有機溶剤中の過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 In the present invention, the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
 着色組成物中における溶剤の含有量は、60~95質量%であることが好ましい。さらに、上限は90質量%以下であることが好ましく、87.5質量%以下であることがより好ましく、85質量%以下であることがさらに好ましい。さらに、下限は、65質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、75質量%以上であることがさらに好ましい。溶剤は、1種単独であってもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 60 to 95% by mass. Further, the upper limit is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 87.5% by mass or less, and further preferably 85% by mass or less. Further, the lower limit is preferably 65% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and further preferably 75% by mass or more. The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、環境規制の観点から環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないとは、着色組成物中における環境規制物質の含有量が50質量ppm以下であることを意味し、30質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、10質量ppm以下であることがさらに好ましく、1質量ppm以下であることが特に好ましい。環境規制物質は、例えばベンゼン;トルエン、キシレン等のアルキルベンゼン類;クロロベンゼン等のハロゲン化ベンゼン類等が挙げられる。これらは、REACH(Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of CHemicals)規則、PRTR(Pollutant Release and Transfer Register)法、VOC(Volatile Organic Compounds)規制等のもとに環境規制物質として登録されており、使用量や取り扱い方法が厳しく規制されている。これらの化合物は、本発明の着色組成物に用いられる各成分などを製造する際に溶剤として用いられることがあり、残留溶剤として着色組成物中に混入することがある。人への安全性、環境への配慮の観点よりこれらの物質は可能な限り低減することが好ましい。環境規制物質を低減する方法としては、系中を加熱や減圧して環境規制物質の沸点以上にして系中から環境規制物質を留去して低減する方法が挙げられる。また、少量の環境規制物質を留去する場合においては、効率を上げる為に該当溶剤と同等の沸点を有する溶剤と共沸させることも有用である。また、ラジカル重合性を有する化合物を含有する場合、減圧留去中にラジカル重合反応が進行して分子間で架橋してしまうことを抑制するために重合禁止剤等を添加して減圧留去してもよい。これらの留去方法は、原料の段階、原料を反応させた生成物(例えば重合した後の樹脂溶液や多官能モノマー溶液)の段階、またはこれらの化合物を混ぜて作製した着色組成物の段階いずれの段階でも可能である。 Further, it is preferable that the coloring composition of the present invention does not substantially contain an environmentally regulated substance from the viewpoint of environmental regulations. In the present invention, substantially free of the environmentally regulated substance means that the content of the environmentally regulated substance in the coloring composition is 50 mass ppm or less, and preferably 30 mass ppm or less. It is more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less. Examples of the environmentally regulated substance include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene. These are REACH (Registration Evolution Analysis and Restriction of Chemicals) rules, PRTR (Pollutant Release and Transfer Register) method, VOC (Volatile and Transfer Registor) method, VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds), and VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds). The method is strictly regulated. These compounds may be used as a solvent in producing each component used in the coloring composition of the present invention, and may be mixed in the coloring composition as a residual solvent. From the viewpoint of human safety and consideration for the environment, it is preferable to reduce these substances as much as possible. As a method for reducing the environmentally regulated substance, there is a method of heating or depressurizing the inside of the system to raise the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substance or higher and distilling off the environmentally regulated substance from the system to reduce the amount. Further, when distilling off a small amount of an environmentally regulated substance, it is also useful to azeotrope with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the solvent in order to improve efficiency. When a compound having radical polymerization property is contained, a polymerization inhibitor or the like is added and the mixture is distilled off under reduced pressure in order to prevent the radical polymerization reaction from proceeding and cross-linking between molecules during distillation under reduced pressure. May be. These distillation methods are either a raw material step, a product obtained by reacting the raw materials (for example, a resin solution after polymerization or a polyfunctional monomer solution), or a colored composition step prepared by mixing these compounds. It is also possible at the stage of.
<<顔料誘導体>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体としては、発色団の一部分を、酸基、塩基性基またはフタルイミドメチル基で置換した構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。顔料誘導体を構成する発色団としては、キノリン骨格、ベンゾイミダゾロン骨格、ジケトピロロピロール骨格、アゾ骨格、フタロシアニン骨格、アンスラキノン骨格、キナクリドン骨格、ジオキサジン骨格、ペリノン骨格、ペリレン骨格、チオインジゴ骨格、イソインドリン骨格、イソインドリノン骨格、キノフタロン骨格、スレン骨格、金属錯体骨格等が挙げられ、キノリン骨格、ベンゾイミダゾロン骨格、ジケトピロロピロール骨格、アゾ骨格、キノフタロン骨格、イソインドリン骨格およびフタロシアニン骨格が好ましく、アゾ骨格およびベンゾイミダゾロン骨格がより好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する酸基としては、スルホ基、カルボキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基がより好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基が好ましく、三級アミノ基がより好ましい。
<< Pigment derivative >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a pigment derivative. Examples of the pigment derivative include compounds having a structure in which a part of the chromophore is replaced with an acid group, a basic group or a phthalimide methyl group. The chromogens constituting the pigment derivative include quinoline skeleton, benzoimidazolone skeleton, diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton, azo skeleton, phthalocyanine skeleton, anthracinone skeleton, quinacridone skeleton, dioxazine skeleton, perinone skeleton, perylene skeleton, thioindigo skeleton, and iso. Examples thereof include indolin skeleton, isoindolinone skeleton, quinophthalone skeleton, slene skeleton, metal complex skeleton, etc. , Azo skeleton and benzoimidazolone skeleton are more preferred. As the acid group of the pigment derivative, a sulfo group and a carboxy group are preferable, and a sulfo group is more preferable. As the basic group of the pigment derivative, an amino group is preferable, and a tertiary amino group is more preferable.
 顔料誘導体の具体例としては、特開昭56-118462号公報、特開昭63-264674号公報、特開平01-217077号公報、特開平03-009961号公報、特開平03-026767号公報、特開平03-153780号公報、特開平03-045662号公報、特開平04-285669号公報、特開平06-145546号公報、特開平06-212088号公報、特開平06-240158号公報、特開平10-030063号公報、特開平10-195326号公報、国際公開第2011/024896号の段落番号0086~0098、国際公開第2012/102399号の段落番号0063~0094、国際公開第2017/038252号の段落番号0082、特開2015-151530号公報の段落番号0171、特開2011-252065号公報の段落番号0162~0183、特開2003-081972号公報、特許第5299151号公報、特開2015-172732号公報、特開2014-199308号公報、特開2014-085562号公報、特開2014-035351号公報、特開2008-081565号公報、特開2019-109512号公報、特開2019-133154号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the pigment derivative include Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 56-118462, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 63-264674, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 01-217077, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-009961, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-026767. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-153780, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-405662, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 04-285646, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 06-145546, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 06-212088, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 06-240158, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-030063, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-195326, paragraph numbers 0086 to 0998 of International Publication No. 2011/024896, paragraph numbers 0063 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2012/102399, International Publication No. 2017/038252. Paragraph No. 0087, Paragraph No. 0171 of JP-A-2015-151530, Paragraph Nos. 0162 to 0183 of JP-A-2011-52065, JP-A-2003-081972, JP-A No. 5299151, JP-A-2015-172732 In JP-A-2014-199308, JP-A-2014-085562, JP-A-2014-035351, JP-A-2008-081565, JP-A-2019-109512, JP-A-2019-133154 The described compounds are mentioned.
 顔料誘導体の含有量は、顔料100質量部に対し、0.1~30質量部が好ましい。この範囲の下限は、0.25質量部以上であることがより好ましく、0.5質量部以上であることがさらに好ましく、0.75質量部以上であることが特に好ましく、1質量部以上であることが一層好ましい。また、この範囲の上限は、25質量部以下であることがより好ましく、20質量部以下であることがさらに好ましく、15質量部以下であることが特に好ましい。顔料誘導体の含有量が上記範囲内であることにより、経時安定性がより向上するという効果がある。顔料誘導体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the pigment derivative is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. The lower limit of this range is more preferably 0.25 parts by mass or more, further preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 0.75 parts by mass or more, and 1 part by mass or more. It is more preferable to have. Further, the upper limit of this range is more preferably 25 parts by mass or less, further preferably 20 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 15 parts by mass or less. When the content of the pigment derivative is within the above range, there is an effect that the stability with time is further improved. As the pigment derivative, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<硬化促進剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物の反応を促進させたり、硬化温度を下げる目的で、硬化促進剤を添加してもよい。硬化促進剤としては、分子内に2個以上のメルカプト基を有する多官能チオール化合物などが挙げられる。多官能チオール化合物は安定性、臭気、解像性、現像性、密着性等の改良を目的として添加してもよい。多官能チオール化合物は、2級のアルカンチオール類であることが好ましく、式(T1)で表される化合物であることがより好ましい。
 式(T1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
<< Curing Accelerator >>
In the coloring composition of the present invention, a curing accelerator may be added for the purpose of accelerating the reaction of the polymerizable compound or lowering the curing temperature. Examples of the curing accelerator include polyfunctional thiol compounds having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule. The polyfunctional thiol compound may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like. The polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol compound, and more preferably a compound represented by the formula (T1).
Equation (T1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 式(T1)中、nは2~4の整数を表し、Lは2~4価の連結基を表す。式(T1)において、連結基Lは炭素数2~12の脂肪族基であることが好ましく、nが2であり、Lが炭素数2~12のアルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。 In the formula (T1), n represents an integer of 2 to 4, and L represents a linking group of 2 to 4 valences. In the formula (T1), the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
 また、硬化促進剤は、メチロール系化合物(例えば特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0246において、架橋剤として例示されている化合物)、アミン類、ホスホニウム塩、アミジン塩、アミド化合物(以上、例えば特開2013-041165号公報の段落番号0186に記載の硬化剤)、塩基発生剤(例えば、特開2014-055114号公報に記載のイオン性化合物)、シアネート化合物(例えば、特開2012-150180号公報の段落番号0071に記載の化合物)、アルコキシシラン化合物(例えば、特開2011-253054号公報に記載のエポキシ基を有するアルコキシシラン化合物)、オニウム塩化合物(例えば、特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0216に酸発生剤として例示されている化合物、特開2009-180949号公報に記載の化合物)などを用いることもできる。 Further, the curing accelerator is a methylol-based compound (for example, a compound exemplified as a cross-linking agent in paragraph No. 0246 of JP-A-2015-034963), amines, phosphonium salt, amidin salt, amide compound (for example, above, for example. A curing agent described in paragraph No. 0186 of JP2013-041165A, a base generator (eg, an ionic compound described in JP2014-0551114), a cyanate compound (eg, JP2012-150180). A compound described in paragraph No. 0071 of JP-A), an alkoxysilane compound (for example, an alkoxysilane compound having an epoxy group described in JP-A-2011-253504), and an onium salt compound (eg, JP-A-2015-034963). A compound exemplified as an acid generator in paragraph No. 0216, a compound described in JP-A-2009-180949) and the like can also be used.
 本発明の着色組成物が硬化促進剤を含有する場合、硬化促進剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.3~8.9質量%が好ましく、0.8~6.4質量%がより好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a curing accelerator, the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. More preferably by mass.
<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することできる。シランカップリング剤としては、一分子中に少なくとも2種の反応性の異なる官能基を有するシラン化合物が好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、ビニル基、エポキシ基、スチレン基、メタクリル基、アミノ基、イソシアヌレート基、ウレイド基、メルカプト基、スルフィド基、および、イソシアネート基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの基と、アルコキシ基とを有するシラン化合物が好ましい。シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-602)、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-603)、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-903)、3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBE-903)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-503)、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-403)等が挙げられる。シランカップリング剤の詳細については、特開2013-254047号公報の段落番号0155~0158の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。本発明の着色組成物がシランカップリング剤を含有する場合、シランカップリング剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.001~20質量%が好ましく、0.01~10質量%がより好ましく、0.1質量%~5質量%が特に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を、1種のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< Silane Coupling Agent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent. As the silane coupling agent, a silane compound having at least two kinds of functional groups having different reactivity in one molecule is preferable. The silane coupling agent includes at least one group selected from a vinyl group, an epoxy group, a styrene group, a methacrylic group, an amino group, an isocyanurate group, a ureido group, a mercapto group, a sulfide group, and an isocyanate group, and an alkoxy group. A silane compound having a above is preferable. Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include N-2- (aminoethyl) -3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (KBM-602, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-2- (aminoethyl) -3. -Aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., KBM-603), 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., KBM-903), 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) KBE-903) manufactured by Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd., 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (KBM-503 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) , KBM-403) and the like. For details of the silane coupling agent, the description in paragraphs 0155 to 0158 of JP2013-254047A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a silane coupling agent, the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.001 to 20% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. Is more preferable, and 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass is particularly preferable. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of silane coupling agent, or may contain two or more kinds of silane coupling agents. When two or more kinds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することができる。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)等が挙げられる。本発明の着色組成物が重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.0001~5質量%が好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を、1種のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< Polymerization inhibitor >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor. Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), and the like. Examples thereof include 2,2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, first cerium salt, etc.). When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types of the polymerization inhibitor. When two or more kinds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。紫外線吸収剤は、共役ジエン化合物、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン化合物、インドール化合物、トリアジン化合物などを用いることができる。これらの詳細については、特開2012-208374号公報の段落番号0052~0072、特開2013-068814号公報の段落番号0317~0334、特開2016-162946号公報の段落番号0061~0080の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。紫外線吸収剤の市販品としては、例えば、UV-503(大東化学(株)製)などが挙げられる。また、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ミヨシ油脂製のMYUAシリーズ(化学工業日報、2016年2月1日)が挙げられる。また、紫外線吸収剤として特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0049~0059に記載の化合物も使用できる。本発明の着色組成物が紫外線吸収剤を含有する場合、紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましく、0.1~3質量%が特に好ましい。また、紫外線吸収剤は、1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< UV absorber >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber. As the ultraviolet absorber, a conjugated diene compound, an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a hydroxyphenyltriazine compound, an indole compound, a triazine compound and the like can be used. For details thereof, refer to paragraph numbers 0052 to 0072 of JP2012-208374A, paragraph numbers 0317 to 0334 of JP2013-066814, and paragraph numbers 0061 to 0080 of JP2016-162946. It can be taken into consideration and these contents are incorporated in the present specification. Examples of commercially available ultraviolet absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Kagaku Co., Ltd.). Examples of the benzotriazole compound include the MYUA series made of Miyoshi Oil & Fat (The Chemical Daily, February 1, 2016). Further, as the ultraviolet absorber, the compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967 can also be used. When the coloring composition of the present invention contains an ultraviolet absorber, the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferable, and 0.1 to 3% by mass is particularly preferable. Further, as the ultraviolet absorber, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を含有することができる。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用することができる。界面活性剤については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0238~0245に記載された界面活性剤が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< Surfactant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used. As for the surfactant, the surfactant described in paragraph Nos. 0238 to 0245 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 is mentioned, and the content thereof is incorporated in the present specification.
 界面活性剤はフッ素系界面活性剤であることが好ましい。着色組成物にフッ素系界面活性剤を含有させることで液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上し、省液性をより改善することができる。また、厚みムラの小さい膜を形成することもできる。 The surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based surfactant. By containing a fluorine-based surfactant in the coloring composition, the liquid characteristics (particularly, fluidity) can be further improved, and the liquid saving property can be further improved. It is also possible to form a film having a small thickness unevenness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、着色組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity in the thickness of the coating film and liquid saving, and has good solubility in a coloring composition.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、特開2014-041318号公報の段落番号0060~0064(対応する国際公開第2014/017669号の段落番号0060~0064)等に記載の界面活性剤、特開2011-132503号公報の段落番号0117~0132に記載の界面活性剤、特開2020-008634号公報に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。フッ素系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF-171、F-172、F-173、F-176、F-177、F-141、F-142、F-143、F-144、F-437、F-475、F-477、F-479、F-482、F-554、F-555-A、F-556、F-557、F-558、F-559、F-560、F-561、F-563、F-565、F-568、F-575、F-780、EXP、MFS-330、R-01、R-40、R-40-LM、R-41、R-41-LM、RS-43、TF-1956、RS-90、R-94、RS-72-K、DS-21(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、FC431、FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、KH-40(以上、AGC(株)製)、PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)、フタージェント208G、215M、245F、601AD、601ADH2、602A、610FM、710FL、710FM、710FS、FTX-218、(以上、株)NEOS製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the fluorine-based surfactant include the surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-041318 (paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of International Publication No. 2014/017669) and the like, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-. The surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 132503 and the surfactants described in JP-A-2020-008634 are mentioned, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Commercially available products of fluorine-based surfactants include, for example, Megafax F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144. , F-437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560. , F-561, F-563, F-565, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP, MFS-330, R-01, R-40, R-40-LM, R-41, R -141-LM, RS-43, TF-1956, RS-90, R-94, RS-72-K, DS-21 (above, manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.), Fluorard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo) 3M Co., Ltd.), Surfron S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH-40 (above, AGC Co., Ltd.), PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (all manufactured by OMNOVA), Surfactant 208G, 215M, 245F, 601AD, 601ADH2, 602A, 610FM, 710FL, 710FM, 710F , (Above, manufactured by NEOS Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を含有する官能基を持つ分子構造を有し、熱を加えるとフッ素原子を含有する官能基の部分が切断されてフッ素原子が揮発するアクリル系化合物も好適に使用できる。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤としては、DIC(株)製のメガファックDSシリーズ(化学工業日報(2016年2月22日)、日経産業新聞(2016年2月23日))、例えばメガファックDS-21が挙げられる。 Further, the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which a portion of the functional group containing a fluorine atom is cut off and the fluorine atom volatilizes when heat is applied. Can be suitably used. Examples of such a fluorine-based surfactant include the Megafuck DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Megafuck. DS-21 can be mentioned.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素化アルキル基またはフッ素化アルキレンエーテル基を有するフッ素原子含有ビニルエーテル化合物と、親水性のビニルエーテル化合物との重合体を用いることも好ましい。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2016-216602号公報に記載されたフッ素系界面活性剤が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound. Examples of such a fluorine-based surfactant include the fluorine-based surfactants described in JP-A-2016-216602, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、ブロックポリマーを用いることもできる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。また、特開2010-032698号公報の段落番号0016~0037に記載されたフッ素含有界面活性剤や、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3000~50000であり、例えば、14000である。上記の化合物中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。
As the fluorine-based surfactant, a block polymer can also be used. The fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meth). A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used. Further, the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A-2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
The weight average molecular weight of the above compounds is preferably 3000 to 50,000, for example 14000. Among the above compounds,% indicating the ratio of the repeating unit is mol%.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落番号0050~0090および段落番号0289~0295に記載された化合物、DIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K等が挙げられる。また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2015-117327号公報の段落番号0015~0158に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain can also be used. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295 of JP2010-164965, Megafuck RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, manufactured by DIC Corporation. RS-72-K and the like can be mentioned. Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, the compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2015-117327 can also be used.
 また、国際公開第2020/084854号に記載の界面活性剤を、炭素数6以上のパーフルオロアルキル基を有する界面活性剤の代替として用いることも、環境規制の観点から好ましい。 It is also preferable from the viewpoint of environmental regulation to use the surfactant described in International Publication No. 2020/088454 as a substitute for the surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms.
 また、式(fi-1)で表される含フッ素イミド塩化合物を界面活性剤として用いることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 式(fi-1)において、mは1または2を表し、nは1~4の整数を表し、αは1または2を表し、Xα+はα価の金属イオン、第1級アンモニウムイオン、第2級アンモニウムイオン、第3級アンモニウムイオン、第4級アンモニウムイオンまたはNH を表す。
It is also preferable to use a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by the formula (fi-1) as a surfactant.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
In the formula (fi-1), m represents 1 or 2, n represents an integer of 1 to 4, α represents 1 or 2, and X α + represents an α-valent metal ion, a primary ammonium ion, and a first. Represents a secondary ammonium ion, a tertiary ammonium ion , a quaternary ammonium ion or NH 4+ .
 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレート及びプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル、プルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2(BASF社製)、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1(BASF社製)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002(和光純薬工業(株)製)、パイオニンD-6112、D-6112-W、D-6315(竹本油脂(株)製)、オルフィンE1010、サーフィノール104、400、440(日信化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ethers, polyoxyethylene stearyl ethers, etc. Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (BASF) , Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (manufactured by BASF), Solsparse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (Manufactured by Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Pionin D-6112, D-6112-W, D-6315 (manufactured by Takemoto Yushi Co., Ltd.), Orfin E1010, Surfinol 104, 400, 440 (manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) And so on.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、トーレシリコーンDC3PA、トーレシリコーンSH7PA、トーレシリコーンDC11PA、トーレシリコーンSH21PA、トーレシリコーンSH28PA、トーレシリコーンSH29PA、トーレシリコーンSH30PA、トーレシリコーンSH8400(以上、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)、TSF-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP-341、KF-6001、KF-6002(以上、信越化学工業(株)製)、BYK-307、BYK-322、BYK-323、BYK-330、BYK-3760、BYK-UV3510(以上、ビックケミー社製)、FZ-2122(ダウ・東レ(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the silicone-based surfactant include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torre Silicone SH21PA, Torre Silicone SH28PA, Torre Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400 (all, Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.). ), TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6001, KF-6002 (above, Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (all manufactured by Big Chemie), FZ-2122 (Dow Toray Co., Ltd.) Made) and the like.
 また、シリコーン系界面活性剤には下記構造の化合物を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Further, a compound having the following structure can also be used as the silicone-based surfactant.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 着色組成物の全固形分中における界面活性剤の含有量は、0.001~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~3.0質量%がより好ましい。界面活性剤は1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 3.0% by mass. The surfactant may be only one kind or two or more kinds. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<その他添加剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物には、必要に応じて、各種添加剤、例えば、充填剤、密着促進剤、酸化防止剤、凝集防止剤等を配合することができる。これらの添加剤としては、特開2004-295116号公報の段落番号0155~0156に記載の添加剤を挙げることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、酸化防止剤としては、例えばフェノール化合物、リン系化合物(例えば特開2011-090147号公報の段落番号0042に記載の化合物)、チオエーテル化合物などを用いることができる。市販品としては、例えばADEKA社製のアデカスタブシリーズ(AO-20、AO-30、AO-40、AO-50、AO-50F、AO-60、AO-60G、AO-80、AO-330など)が挙げられる。また、酸化防止剤として、国際公開第2017/006600号に記載された多官能ヒンダードアミン酸化防止剤、国際公開第2017/164024号に記載された酸化防止剤、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0023~0048に記載された酸化防止剤を用いることもできる。酸化防止剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。また、本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、潜在酸化防止剤を含有してもよい。潜在酸化防止剤としては、酸化防止剤として機能する部位が保護基で保護された化合物であって、100~250℃で加熱するか、又は酸/塩基触媒存在下で80~200℃で加熱することにより保護基が脱離して酸化防止剤として機能する化合物が挙げられる。潜在酸化防止剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2014/021023号、国際公開第2017/030005号、特開2017-008219号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。市販品としては、アデカアークルズGPA-5001(ADEKA社製)等が挙げられる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0078に記載の増感剤や光安定剤、同公報の段落0081に記載の熱重合防止剤、特開2018-091940号公報の段落番号0242に記載の貯蔵安定化剤を含有することができる。
<< Other additives >>
Various additives such as fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, antiaggregating agents and the like can be added to the coloring composition of the present invention, if necessary. Examples of these additives include the additives described in paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A-2004-295116, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification. Further, as the antioxidant, for example, a phenol compound, a phosphorus-based compound (for example, the compound described in paragraph No. 0042 of JP-A-2011-090147), a thioether compound and the like can be used. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA's ADEKA stub series (AO-20, AO-30, AO-40, AO-50, AO-50F, AO-60, AO-60G, AO-80, AO-330, etc. ). Further, as the antioxidant, the polyfunctional hindered amine antioxidant described in International Publication No. 2017/006600, the antioxidant described in International Publication No. 2017/1604024, paragraph Nos. 0023 to Patent No. 6268967. The antioxidant described in 0048 can also be used. Only one kind of antioxidant may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. In addition, the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a latent antioxidant, if necessary. The latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site that functions as an antioxidant is protected by a protecting group, and is heated at 100 to 250 ° C. or at 80 to 200 ° C. in the presence of an acid / base catalyst. This includes compounds in which the protecting group is desorbed and functions as an antioxidant. Specific examples of the latent antioxidant include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARKULS GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA). Further, the coloring composition of the present invention includes a sensitizer and a photostabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A-2004-295116, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 1981 of JP-A-2004-091940, and JP-A-2018-091940. The storage stabilizer described in paragraph No. 0242 of the publication can be contained.
 環境規制の観点から、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用が規制されることがある。本発明の着色組成物において、上記した化合物の含有率を小さくする場合、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸)及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸)及びその塩の含有率は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01ppb~1,000ppbの範囲であることが好ましく、0.05ppb~500ppbの範囲であることがより好ましく、0.1ppb~300ppbの範囲であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まなくてもよい。例えば、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物を用いることで、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まない着色組成物を選択してもよい。規制化合物の代替となりうる化合物としては、例えば、パーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数の違いによって規制対象から除外された化合物が挙げられる。ただし、上記した内容は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用を妨げるものではない。本発明の着色組成物は、許容される最大の範囲内で、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を含んでもよい。 From the viewpoint of environmental regulation, the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt may be restricted. In the coloring composition of the present invention, when the content of the above-mentioned compound is reduced, the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid (particularly the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group), a salt thereof, and a par The content of the fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (particularly the perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salt is 0.01 ppb to 1,000 ppb with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, and even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb. The coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and salts thereof, as well as perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and salts thereof. For example, by using a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt, perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid can be used. And a coloring composition that is substantially free of salts thereof may be selected. Examples of compounds that can substitute for the regulated compound include compounds excluded from the regulation due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkyl group. However, the above-mentioned contents do not prevent the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and a salt thereof, and a perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and a salt thereof within the maximum allowable range.
<収容容器>
 本発明の着色組成物の収容容器としては、特に限定はなく、公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器として、原材料や着色組成物中への不純物混入を抑制することを目的に、容器内壁を6種6層の樹脂で構成する多層ボトルや6種の樹脂を7層構造にしたボトルを使用することも好ましい。このような容器としては例えば特開2015-123351号公報に記載の容器が挙げられる。また、容器内壁は、容器内壁からの金属溶出を防ぎ、組成物の保存安定性を高めたり、成分変質を抑制するなど目的で、ガラス製やステンレス製などにすることも好ましい。
<Accommodation container>
The container for containing the coloring composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known container can be used. In addition, as a storage container, for the purpose of suppressing impurities from being mixed into raw materials and coloring compositions, a multi-layer bottle having a container inner wall made of 6 types and 6 layers of resin and a bottle having 6 types of resin having a 7-layer structure. It is also preferable to use. Examples of such a container include the container described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-123351. Further, the inner wall of the container is preferably made of glass or stainless steel for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, improving the storage stability of the composition, and suppressing the deterioration of the components.
<着色組成物の製造方法>
 本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合して製造できる。着色組成物の製造に際しては、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解および/または分散して着色組成物を製造してもよいし、必要に応じて、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して着色組成物を製造してもよい。
<Manufacturing method of coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention can be produced by mixing the above-mentioned components. In the production of the coloring composition, all the components may be simultaneously dissolved and / or dispersed in a solvent to produce the coloring composition, or each component may be appropriately used as two or more solutions or dispersions, if necessary. Then, these may be mixed at the time of use (at the time of application) to produce a colored composition.
 また、着色組成物の製造に際して、顔料を分散させるプロセスを含んでいてもよい。顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいて、顔料の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における顔料の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、顔料を分散させるプロセスおよび分散機は、「分散技術大全集、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落番号0022に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用出来る。また顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報の記載を参酌できる。 Further, the process of dispersing the pigment may be included in the production of the coloring composition. In the process of dispersing the pigment, the mechanical force used for dispersing the pigment includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation and the like. Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion and the like. Further, in the pulverization of the pigment in the sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use beads having a small diameter and to perform the treatment under the condition that the pulverization efficiency is increased by increasing the filling rate of the beads. Further, it is preferable to remove the coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation or the like after the pulverization treatment. In addition, the process and disperser for dispersing pigments are "Dispersion Technology Complete Works, Published by Information Organization Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005" and "Dispersion technology centered on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system) and industrial". Practical application The process and disperser described in Paragraph No. 0022 of JP-A-2015-157893, "Comprehensive Data Collection, Published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978" can be preferably used. Further, in the process of dispersing the pigment, the particles may be miniaturized in the salt milling step. For the materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling step, for example, the descriptions in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629 can be referred to.
 着色組成物の製造にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、着色組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているフィルタであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)、ポリフッ化ビニリデン(PVDF)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン(例えばナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6)等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量のポリオレフィン樹脂を含む)等の素材を用いたフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)およびナイロンが好ましい。 In the production of the coloring composition, it is preferable to filter the coloring composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects. As the filter, any filter that has been conventionally used for filtration or the like can be used without particular limitation. For example, fluororesins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyamide resins such as nylon (eg, nylon-6, nylon-6,6), and polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP). Examples thereof include filters using materials such as (including high-density, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene resin). Among these materials, polypropylene (including high-density polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
 フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μmが好ましく、0.01~3.0μmがより好ましく、0.05~0.5μmが更に好ましい。フィルタの孔径が上記範囲であれば、微細な異物をより確実に除去できる。フィルタの孔径値については、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。フィルタは、日本ポール株式会社(DFA4201NIEY、DFA4201NAEY、DFA4201J006Pなど)、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)および株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタを用いることができる。 The pore diameter of the filter is preferably 0.01 to 7.0 μm, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0 μm, and even more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 μm. If the pore diameter of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably. For the hole diameter value of the filter, the nominal value of the filter manufacturer can be referred to. As the filter, various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NIEY, DFA4201NAEY, DFA4201J006P, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nippon Microlith Co., Ltd.), Kitts Microfilter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used. ..
 また、フィルタとしてファイバ状のろ材を用いることも好ましい。ファイバ状のろ材としては、例えばポリプロピレンファイバ、ナイロンファイバ、グラスファイバ等が挙げられる。市販品としては、ロキテクノ社製のSBPタイプシリーズ(SBP008など)、TPRタイプシリーズ(TPR002、TPR005など)、SHPXタイプシリーズ(SHPX003など)が挙げられる。フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタ(例えば、第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタなど)を組み合わせてもよい。その際、各フィルタでのろ過は、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。また、第1のフィルタでのろ過は、分散液のみに対して行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタでろ過を行ってもよい。 It is also preferable to use a fiber-like filter medium as the filter. Examples of the fiber-like filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber and the like. Examples of commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008, etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005, etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003, etc.) manufactured by Roki Techno Co., Ltd. When using filters, different filters (eg, first filter and second filter, etc.) may be combined. At that time, the filtration with each filter may be performed only once or twice or more. Further, filters having different pore diameters may be combined within the above-mentioned range. Further, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after mixing the other components, the filtration may be performed with the second filter.
<硬化膜>
 本発明の硬化膜は、上述した本発明の着色組成物を硬化して得られた膜である。本発明の硬化膜は、カラーフィルタなどに用いることができる。具体的には、カラーフィルタの着色層(画素)として好ましく用いることができ、赤色画素としてより好ましく用いられる。本発明の硬化膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できるが、0.5~3.0μmであることが好ましい。下限は0.8μm以上が好ましく、1.0μm以上がより好ましく、1.1μm以上がさらに好ましい。上限は2.5μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましく、1.8μm以下がさらに好ましい。
<Hardened film>
The cured film of the present invention is a film obtained by curing the above-mentioned coloring composition of the present invention. The cured film of the present invention can be used for a color filter or the like. Specifically, it can be preferably used as a colored layer (pixel) of a color filter, and more preferably used as a red pixel. The film thickness of the cured film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted depending on the intended purpose, but is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm. The lower limit is preferably 0.8 μm or more, more preferably 1.0 μm or more, still more preferably 1.1 μm or more. The upper limit is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, still more preferably 1.8 μm or less.
<硬化膜の形成方法>
 次に、硬化膜の形成方法について説明する。
 硬化膜の形成方法は、本発明の着色組成物を支持体上に塗布して着色組成物層を形成する工程と、この着色組成物層を露光する工程(露光工程)と、露光後の着色組成物層を加熱処理する工程(ポストベーク工程)と、を含むことが好ましい。また、パターン状の硬化膜(画素)を形成する場合、上記露光工程において、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光し、そして、露光工程とポストベーク工程との間に露光後の着色組成物層を現像する工程(現像工程)をさらに含むことが好ましい。
<Method of forming a cured film>
Next, a method for forming the cured film will be described.
The method for forming the cured film includes a step of applying the coloring composition of the present invention on a support to form a coloring composition layer, a step of exposing the coloring composition layer (exposure step), and coloring after exposure. It is preferable to include a step of heat-treating the composition layer (post-baking step). Further, when forming a patterned cured film (pixels), the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern in the above exposure step, and the colored composition layer after exposure is formed between the exposure step and the post-baking step. It is preferable to further include a step of developing (development step).
 硬化膜を形成するにあたり、本発明においては、全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で行うことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、「全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で行う」とは、着色組成物を用いて硬化膜を形成する工程の全てを、150℃以下の温度で行うことを意味する。露光後の着色組成物層を現像した後、さらに加熱する工程を設ける場合は、この加熱する工程も150℃以下の温度で行うことを意味する。以下、各工程について詳細を述べる。 In forming the cured film, in the present invention, it is preferable to carry out at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process. In the present invention, "performing at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process" means that all the steps of forming a cured film using the coloring composition are performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower. When a step of further heating after developing the colored composition layer after exposure is provided, it means that this heating step is also performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower. Hereinafter, each step will be described in detail.
 着色組成物層を形成する工程では、本発明の着色組成物を支持体上に塗布して着色組成物層を形成する。支持体としては、ガラス基板や樹脂基板などが挙げられる。樹脂基板としては、ポリカーボネート基板、ポリエステル基板、芳香族ポリアミド基板、ポリアミドイミド基板、ポリイミド基板等が挙げられる。これらの基板上には有機発光層が形成されていてもよい。また、支持体には、シリコン基板を用いることもできる。シリコン基板には、電荷結合素子(CCD)、相補型金属酸化膜半導体(CMOS)、透明導電膜などが形成されていてもよい。また、支持体には、上部の層との密着性改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下地層が設けられていてもよい。下地層の表面接触角は、ジヨードメタンで測定した際に20~70°であることが好ましい。また、水で測定した際に30~80°であることが好ましい。下地層の表面接触角が上記範囲であれば、着色組成物の塗れ性が良好である。下地層の表面接触角の調整は、たとえば、界面活性剤の添加などの方法で行うことができる。下地層は、本明細書に記載の着色組成物から着色剤を除いた組成物や、本明細書記載の樹脂、重合性化合物、界面活性剤などを含む組成物などを用いて形成してもよい。 In the step of forming the coloring composition layer, the coloring composition of the present invention is applied onto the support to form the coloring composition layer. Examples of the support include a glass substrate and a resin substrate. Examples of the resin substrate include a polycarbonate substrate, a polyester substrate, an aromatic polyamide substrate, a polyamide-imide substrate, a polyimide substrate and the like. An organic light emitting layer may be formed on these substrates. Further, a silicon substrate can also be used as the support. A charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, or the like may be formed on the silicon substrate. Further, the support may be provided with a base layer for improving the adhesion with the upper layer, preventing the diffusion of substances, or flattening the surface of the substrate. The surface contact angle of the base layer is preferably 20 to 70 ° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80 ° when measured with water. When the surface contact angle of the base layer is within the above range, the coating property of the coloring composition is good. The surface contact angle of the base layer can be adjusted by, for example, adding a surfactant. The underlayer may be formed by using a composition obtained by removing the coloring agent from the coloring composition described in the present specification, a composition containing the resin, the polymerizable compound, the surfactant and the like described in the present specification, and the like. good.
 着色組成物の塗布方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、滴下法(ドロップキャスト);スリットコート法;スプレー法;ロールコート法;回転塗布法(スピンコーティング);流延塗布法;スリットアンドスピン法;プリウェット法(例えば、特開2009-145395号公報に記載されている方法);インクジェット(例えば、オンデマンド方式、ピエゾ方式、サーマル方式)、ノズルジェット等の吐出系印刷、フレキソ印刷、スクリーン印刷、グラビア印刷、反転オフセット印刷、メタルマスク印刷法などの各種印刷法;金型等を用いた転写法;ナノインプリント法などが挙げられる。インクジェットでの適用方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば「広がる・使えるインクジェット-特許に見る無限の可能性-、2005年2月発行、住ベテクノリサーチ」に示された方法(特に115ページ~133ページ)や、特開2003-262716号公報、特開2003-185831号公報、特開2003-261827号公報、特開2012-126830号公報、特開2006-169325号公報などに記載の方法が挙げられる。また、着色組成物の塗布方法については、国際公開第2017/030174号、国際公開第2017/018419号の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As a method for applying the coloring composition, a known method can be used. For example, a drop method (drop cast); a slit coat method; a spray method; a roll coat method; a rotary coating method (spin coating); a cast coating method; a slit and spin method; a pre-wet method (for example, JP-A-2009-145395). Methods described in the publication); Inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing method, etc. Various printing methods; transfer method using a mold or the like; nanoinprint method and the like can be mentioned. The method of application in inkjet is not particularly limited, and is, for example, the method shown in "Expandable / usable inkjet-infinite possibilities seen in patents-, published in February 2005, Sumi Betechno Research" (especially from page 115). Page 133), JP-A-2003-262716, JP-A-2003-185831, JP-A-2003-261827, JP-A-2012-126830, JP-A-2006-169325, and the like. Can be mentioned. Further, regarding the method of applying the coloring composition, the description of International Publication No. 2017/030174 and International Publication No. 2017/018419 can be referred to, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
 支持体上に形成した着色組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、80℃以下が好ましく、70℃以下がより好ましく、60℃以下がさらに好ましく、50℃以下が特に好ましい。下限は、例えば、40℃以上とすることができる。プリベーク時間は、10~3600秒が好ましい。プリベークは、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). When prebaking is performed, the prebake temperature is preferably 80 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or lower, further preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 50 ° C. or lower. The lower limit can be, for example, 40 ° C. or higher. The prebake time is preferably 10 to 3600 seconds. Pre-baking can be performed on a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
 次に、着色組成物層を露光する(露光工程)。例えば、着色組成物層に対し、ステッパー露光機やスキャナ露光機などを用いて行うことができる。パターン状の硬化膜(画素)を形成する場合は、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する。例えば、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。 Next, the coloring composition layer is exposed (exposure step). For example, the coloring composition layer can be subjected to a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. When forming a patterned cured film (pixels), the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern. For example, the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern. As a result, the exposed portion can be cured.
 露光に際して用いることができる光としては、g線(波長436nm)、i線(波長365nm)等の紫外線が挙げられる。i線を使用する露光は、韓国公開特許第1020170122130号公報に記載されているように、i線よりも短い波長の光をカットしながら行ってもよい。また、波長300nm以下の光(好ましくは波長180~300nmの光)を用いることもできる。波長300nm以下の光としては、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられ、KrF線(波長248nm)が好ましい。また、300nm以上の長波な光源も利用できる。 Examples of the light that can be used for exposure include ultraviolet rays such as g-line (wavelength 436 nm) and i-line (wavelength 365 nm). The exposure using the i-line may be performed while cutting light having a wavelength shorter than that of the i-line, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10201701122130. Further, light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light having a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of the light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF line (wavelength 248 nm), ArF line (wavelength 193 nm) and the like, and KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) is preferable. Further, a long wave light source having a diameter of 300 nm or more can also be used.
 また、露光に際して、光を連続的に照射して露光してもよく、パルス的に照射して露光(パルス露光)してもよい。なお、パルス露光とは、短時間(例えば、ミリ秒レベル以下)のサイクルで光の照射と休止を繰り返して露光する方式の露光方法のことである。 Further, at the time of exposure, light may be continuously irradiated for exposure, or pulsed irradiation may be performed for exposure (pulse exposure). The pulse exposure is an exposure method of a method in which light irradiation and pause are repeated in a cycle of a short time (for example, a millisecond level or less).
 照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cmがより好ましい。露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、または、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、または、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1000W/m~100000W/m(例えば、5000W/m、15000W/m、または、35000W/m)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10000W/m、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20000W/mなどとすることができる。 The irradiation amount (exposure amount) is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J / cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J / cm 2 . The oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected, and in addition to the operation in the atmosphere, for example, in a low oxygen atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, or substantially). It may be exposed in an oxygen-free environment), or may be exposed in a high oxygen atmosphere (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume) in which the oxygen concentration exceeds 21% by volume. The exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and is usually selected from the range of 1000 W / m 2 to 100,000 W / m 2 (for example, 5000 W / m 2 , 15,000 W / m 2 , or 35,000 W / m 2 ). Can be done. The oxygen concentration and the exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined with each other, and for example, the illuminance may be 10,000 W / m 2 when the oxygen concentration is 10% by volume, the illuminance may be 20000 W / m 2 when the oxygen concentration is 35% by volume, and the like.
 硬化膜の形成方法において、露光後の着色組成物層を現像することも好ましい。特に、露光工程において、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光した場合には、露光後の着色組成物層を現像することで、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去して硬化膜をパターン状に形成して画素を形成することができる。着色組成物層の未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の着色組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。 In the method for forming the cured film, it is also preferable to develop the colored composition layer after exposure. In particular, when the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern in the exposure step, the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer is developed and removed by developing the exposed colored composition layer to pattern the cured film. It can be formed into a shape to form a pixel. The development and removal of the unexposed portion of the coloring composition layer can be performed using a developing solution. As a result, the colored composition layer of the unexposed portion in the exposure step is eluted in the developing solution, and only the photocured portion remains. The temperature of the developer is preferably, for example, 20 to 30 ° C. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the steps of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
 現像液としては、有機溶剤、アルカリ現像液などが挙げられ、アルカリ現像液であることが好ましい。アルカリ現像液としては、アルカリ剤を純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液(アルカリ現像液)が好ましい。アルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、ジグリコールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、ヒドロキシアミン、エチレンジアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物や、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウムなどの無機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられる。アルカリ剤は、分子量が大きい化合物の方が環境面および安全面で好ましい。アルカリ性水溶液のアルカリ剤の濃度は、0.001~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~1質量%がより好ましい。また、現像液は、さらに界面活性剤を含有していてもよい。界面活性剤としては、上述した界面活性剤が挙げられ、ノニオン系界面活性剤が好ましい。現像液は、移送や保管の便宜などの観点より、一旦濃縮液として製造し、使用時に必要な濃度に希釈してもよい。希釈倍率は特に限定されないが、例えば1.5~100倍の範囲に設定することができる。また、現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)することも好ましい。また、リンスは、現像後の着色組成物層が形成された支持体を回転させつつ、現像後の着色組成物層へリンス液を供給して行うことが好ましい。また、リンス液を吐出させるノズルを支持体の中心部から支持体の周縁部に移動させて行うことも好ましい。この際、ノズルの支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させるにあたり、ノズルの移動速度を徐々に低下させながら移動させてもよい。このようにしてリンスを行うことで、リンスの面内ばらつきを抑制できる。また、ノズルを支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させつつ、支持体の回転速度を徐々に低下させても同様の効果が得られる。 Examples of the developing solution include organic solvents and alkaline developing solutions, and alkaline developing solutions are preferable. As the alkaline developer, an alkaline aqueous solution (alkaline developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water is preferable. Examples of the alkaline agent include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxyamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide. , Ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene, etc. Examples thereof include organic alkaline compounds and inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate. As the alkaline agent, a compound having a large molecular weight is preferable in terms of environment and safety. The concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. Further, the developer may further contain a surfactant. Examples of the surfactant include the above-mentioned surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable. From the viewpoint of convenience of transfer and storage, the developer may be once produced as a concentrated solution and diluted to a concentration required for use. The dilution ratio is not particularly limited, but can be set in the range of, for example, 1.5 to 100 times. It is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after development. Further, it is preferable that the rinsing is performed by supplying the rinsing liquid to the developed colored composition layer while rotating the support on which the developed colored composition layer is formed. It is also preferable to move the nozzle for discharging the rinse liquid from the central portion of the support to the peripheral edge of the support. At this time, when moving the nozzle from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion, the nozzle may be moved while gradually reducing the moving speed. By rinsing in this way, in-plane variation of the rinse can be suppressed. Further, the same effect can be obtained by gradually reducing the rotation speed of the support while moving the nozzle from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion.
 現像後、乾燥を施した後に追加露光処理や加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことも好ましい。追加露光処理やポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の硬化処理である。 It is also preferable to perform additional exposure treatment or heat treatment (post-baking) after development and drying. Additional exposure processing and post-baking are post-development curing treatments to complete the curing.
 ポストベークを行う場合、加熱温度は150℃以下が好ましい。加熱温度の上限は、120℃以下がより好ましく、100℃以下がさらに好ましい。加熱温度の下限は、組成物の硬化を促進できれば特に制限されないが、50℃以上がより好ましく、75℃以上がさらに好ましい。加熱時間は1分以上が好ましく、5分以上がより好ましく、10分以上がさらに好ましい。上限は特に限定はないが、生産性の観点から20分以下が好ましい。ポストベークは、不活性ガスの雰囲気下で行うことも好ましい。この態様によれば、熱重合を、酸素に阻害されることなく、非常に高い効率で進行させることができ、全工程を通じて120℃以下の温度で画素を製造した場合であっても、平坦性が良好で、耐溶剤性などの特性に優れた画素を製造することができる。不活性ガスとしては、窒素ガス、アルゴンガス、ヘリウムガス等が挙げられ、窒素ガスであることが好ましい。ポストベーク時の酸素濃度は、100ppm以下であることが好ましい。 When performing post-baking, the heating temperature is preferably 150 ° C or lower. The upper limit of the heating temperature is more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, further preferably 100 ° C. or lower. The lower limit of the heating temperature is not particularly limited as long as it can promote the curing of the composition, but is more preferably 50 ° C. or higher, further preferably 75 ° C. or higher. The heating time is preferably 1 minute or longer, more preferably 5 minutes or longer, and even more preferably 10 minutes or longer. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but 20 minutes or less is preferable from the viewpoint of productivity. Post-baking is also preferably carried out in an atmosphere of an inert gas. According to this aspect, thermal polymerization can proceed with very high efficiency without being hindered by oxygen, and even when pixels are manufactured at a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process, flatness is achieved. It is possible to manufacture pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance. Examples of the inert gas include nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas and the like, and nitrogen gas is preferable. The oxygen concentration at the time of post-baking is preferably 100 ppm or less.
 追加露光処理を行う場合、波長254~350nmの光を照射して露光することが好ましい。より好ましい態様としては、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程(現像前の露光)は、着色組成物層に対して350nmを超え380nm以下の波長を有する光(好ましくは波長355~370nmの光、より好ましくはi線)を照射して露光して行い、追加露光処理(現像後の露光)は、現像後の着色組成物層に対して、波長254~350nmの光(好ましくは波長254nmの光)を照射して露光することが好ましい。この態様によれば、最初の露光(現像前の露光)で着色組成物層を適度に硬化させることができ、次の露光(現像後の露光)で着色組成物層全体をほぼ完全に硬化させることができるので、結果として、低温条件でも、着色組成物層を充分に硬化させて、耐溶剤性、密着性およびパターンの矩形性などの特性に優れた画素を形成することができる。このように2段階で露光を行う場合、着色組成物には、光重合開始剤として、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤と、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以下で、かつ、波長254nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤とを含むものを用いることが好ましい。 When performing the additional exposure processing, it is preferable to irradiate with light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm for exposure. In a more preferred embodiment, the step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern (exposure before development) involves light having a wavelength of more than 350 nm and 380 nm or less (preferably having a wavelength of 355 to 370 nm) with respect to the colored composition layer. The exposure is performed by irradiating with light, more preferably i-line), and the additional exposure treatment (exposure after development) is performed with respect to the developed colored composition layer with light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm (preferably a wavelength of 254 nm). It is preferable to irradiate and expose the light. According to this aspect, the coloring composition layer can be appropriately cured by the first exposure (exposure before development), and the entire coloring composition layer is cured almost completely by the next exposure (exposure after development). As a result, the colored composition layer can be sufficiently cured even under low temperature conditions to form pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance, adhesion, and rectangularity of the pattern. When the exposure is carried out in two steps as described above, the coloring composition contains, as a photopolymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more in a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol. Those containing a photopolymerization initiator having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 × 10 2 mL / g cm or less at a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol and an extinction coefficient of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more at a wavelength of 254 nm. It is preferable to use it.
 現像後の露光は、例えば紫外線フォトレジスト硬化装置を用いて行うことができる。紫外線フォトレジスト硬化装置からは、例えば波長254~350nmの光とともに、これ以外の光(例えばi線)が照射されてもよい。 Exposure after development can be performed using, for example, an ultraviolet photoresist curing device. The ultraviolet photoresist curing apparatus may irradiate light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm and other light (for example, i-line).
 現像後の露光での露光量(照射量)は、30~4000mJ/cmが好ましく、50~3500mJ/cmがより好ましい。現像前の露光で用いられる光の波長と、現像後の露光で用いられる光の波長の差は、200nm以下であることが好ましく、100~150nmであることがより好ましい。 The exposure amount (irradiation amount) in the exposure after development is preferably 30 to 4000 mJ / cm 2 , more preferably 50 to 3500 mJ / cm 2 . The difference between the wavelength of the light used in the exposure before development and the wavelength of the light used in the exposure after development is preferably 200 nm or less, and more preferably 100 to 150 nm.
<カラーフィルタ>
 次に、本発明のカラーフィルタについて説明する。本発明のカラーフィルタは、上述した本発明の硬化膜を有する。好ましくは、カラーフィルタの着色画素として、より好ましくは赤色画素として、本発明の硬化膜を有する。
<Color filter>
Next, the color filter of the present invention will be described. The color filter of the present invention has the above-mentioned cured film of the present invention. The cured film of the present invention is preferably provided as a colored pixel of a color filter, more preferably as a red pixel.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、本発明の硬化膜の画素の他に、他の色相の着色画素を有していることが好ましい。他の色相の着色画素としては、青色画素、緑色画素、黄色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素などが挙げられる。本発明のカラーフィルタの好ましい態様として、本発明の硬化膜で構成された赤色画素と、緑色画素と、青色画素とを有する態様が挙げられる。 It is preferable that the color filter of the present invention has colored pixels of other hues in addition to the pixels of the cured film of the present invention. Examples of the colored pixels of other hues include blue pixels, green pixels, yellow pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and the like. A preferred embodiment of the color filter of the present invention includes an embodiment having a red pixel, a green pixel, and a blue pixel composed of the cured film of the present invention.
 本発明の硬化膜の画素と組み合わせて用いることが好ましい緑色画素形成用の着色組成物は、波長400~450nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax11と波長475~575nmの光に対する吸光度の最小値Amin12との比Amax11/Amin11が15以上であることが好ましく、20以上であることがより好ましく、25以上であることが更に好ましい。 The coloring composition for forming green pixels, which is preferably used in combination with the pixels of the cured film of the present invention, has a maximum absorbance A max11 for light having a wavelength of 400 to 450 nm and a minimum absorbance A for light having a wavelength 475 to 575 nm. The ratio A max11 / A min11 with min12 is preferably 15 or more, more preferably 20 or more, and further preferably 25 or more.
 また、上記緑色画素形成用の着色組成物が示す波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.3となる波長が455~505nmの範囲に存在することが好ましく、460~500nmの範囲に存在することがより好ましく、465~495nmの範囲に存在することが更に好ましく、470~490nmの範囲に存在することが特に好ましい。 Further, when the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 450 nm indicated by the coloring composition for forming green pixels is 1, the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.3 is preferably in the range of 455 to 505 nm, preferably 460 to 500 nm. It is more preferably present in the range, further preferably in the range of 465 to 495 nm, and particularly preferably in the range of 470 to 490 nm.
 本発明の硬化膜の画素と組み合わせて用いることが好ましい青色画素形成用の着色組成物は、波長550~650nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax21と波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最小値Amin21との比Amax21/Amin21が10以上であることが好ましく、12.5以上であることがより好ましく、15以上であることが更に好ましい。 The coloring composition for forming blue pixels, which is preferably used in combination with the pixels of the cured film of the present invention, has a maximum absorbance A max21 for light having a wavelength of 550 to 650 nm and a minimum absorbance Amin21 for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm. The ratio of A max21 / A min21 to and A max21 / A min21 is preferably 10 or more, more preferably 12.5 or more, and further preferably 15 or more.
 また、上記青色画素形成用の着色組成物が示す波長600nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.3となる波長が475~555nmの範囲に存在することが好ましく、480~540nmの範囲に存在することがより好ましく、485~525nmの範囲に存在することが更に好ましく、490~510nmの範囲に存在することが特に好ましい。 Further, when the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 600 nm indicated by the coloring composition for forming blue pixels is 1, the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.3 is preferably in the range of 475 to 555 nm, preferably 480 to 540 nm. It is more preferably present in the range, more preferably in the range of 485 to 525 nm, and particularly preferably in the range of 490 to 510 nm.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、表示装置や、CCD(電荷結合素子)やCMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)などの固体撮像素子などに用いることができる。 The color filter of the present invention can be used for a display device, a solid-state image pickup device such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) or CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor).
 本発明のカラーフィルタにおいて本発明の硬化膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できるが、0.5~3.0μmであることが好ましい。下限は0.8μm以上が好ましく、1.0μm以上がより好ましく、1.1μm以上がさらに好ましい。上限は2.5μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましく、1.8μm以下がさらに好ましい。 In the color filter of the present invention, the film thickness of the cured film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted depending on the intended purpose, but is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm. The lower limit is preferably 0.8 μm or more, more preferably 1.0 μm or more, still more preferably 1.1 μm or more. The upper limit is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, still more preferably 1.8 μm or less.
 本発明のカラーフィルタにおいて、画素の線幅(パターンサイズ)は、2.0~10.0μmであることが好ましい。上限は7.5μm以下が好ましく、5.0μm以下がより好ましく、4.0μm以下がさらに好ましい。下限は2.25μm以上が好ましく、2.5μm以上がより好ましく、2.75μm以上がさらに好ましい。 In the color filter of the present invention, the line width (pattern size) of the pixels is preferably 2.0 to 10.0 μm. The upper limit is preferably 7.5 μm or less, more preferably 5.0 μm or less, still more preferably 4.0 μm or less. The lower limit is preferably 2.25 μm or more, more preferably 2.5 μm or more, still more preferably 2.75 μm or more.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、本発明の硬化膜の表面に保護層が設けられていてもよい。保護層を設けることで、酸素遮断化、低反射化、親疎水化、特定波長の光(紫外線、近赤外線等)の遮蔽等の種々の機能を付与することができる。保護層の厚さとしては、0.01~10μmが好ましく、0.1~5μmがより好ましい。保護層の形成方法としては、有機溶剤に溶解した樹脂組成物を塗布して形成する方法、化学気相蒸着法、成型した樹脂を接着材で貼りつける方法等が挙げられる。保護層を構成する成分としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、ポリオール樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アラミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、変性シリコーン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリアクリロニトリル樹脂、セルロース樹脂、Si、C、W、Al、Mo、SiO、Siなどが挙げられ、これらの成分を二種以上含有しても良い。例えば、酸素遮断化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層はポリオール樹脂と、SiOと、Siを含むことが好ましい。また、低反射化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層は(メタ)アクリル樹脂とフッ素樹脂を含むことが好ましい。 The color filter of the present invention may be provided with a protective layer on the surface of the cured film of the present invention. By providing the protective layer, various functions such as oxygen blocking, low reflection, prohydrophobicization, and shielding of light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.) can be imparted. The thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 5 μm. Examples of the method for forming the protective layer include a method of applying a resin composition dissolved in an organic solvent to form the protective layer, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of attaching a molded resin with an adhesive. The components constituting the protective layer include (meth) acrylic resin, en-thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resin, and polyimide. Resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, polyol resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, aramid resin, polyamide resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, modified silicone resin, fluorine Examples thereof include resins, polycarbonate resins, polyacrylonitrile resins, cellulose resins, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , Si 2 N 4 , and the like, and two or more of these components may be contained. For example, in the case of a protective layer for the purpose of blocking oxygen, it is preferable that the protective layer contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4 . Further, in the case of a protective layer for the purpose of reducing reflection, it is preferable that the protective layer contains a (meth) acrylic resin and a fluororesin.
 樹脂組成物を塗布して保護層を形成する場合、樹脂組成物の塗布方法としては、スピンコート法、キャスト法、スクリーン印刷法、インクジェット法等の公知の方法を用いることができる。樹脂組成物に含まれる有機溶剤は、公知の有機溶剤(例えば、プロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート、シクロペンタノン、乳酸エチル等)を用いることが出来る。保護層を化学気相蒸着法にて形成する場合、化学気相蒸着法としては、公知の化学気相蒸着法(熱化学気相蒸着法、プラズマ化学気相蒸着法、光化学気相蒸着法)を用いることができる。 When the resin composition is applied to form the protective layer, a known method such as a spin coating method, a casting method, a screen printing method, or an inkjet method can be used as the application method of the resin composition. As the organic solvent contained in the resin composition, a known organic solvent (for example, propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.) can be used. When the protective layer is formed by the chemical vapor deposition method, the known chemical vapor deposition method (thermochemical vapor deposition method, plasma chemical vapor deposition method, photochemical vapor deposition method) is used as the chemical vapor deposition method. Can be used.
 保護層は、必要に応じて、有機微粒子、無機微粒子、特定波長の光(例えば、紫外線、近赤外線等)の吸収剤、屈折率調整剤、酸化防止剤、密着剤、界面活性剤等の添加剤を含有しても良い。有機微粒子の例としては、高分子微粒子(例えば、シリコーン樹脂微粒子、ポリスチレン微粒子、メラミン樹脂微粒子)が挙げられ、無機微粒子の例としては、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化インジウム、酸化アルミニウム、窒化チタン、酸窒化チタン、フッ化マグネシウム、中空シリカ、シリカ、炭酸カルシウム、硫酸バリウム等が挙げられる。特定波長の光の吸収剤は公知の吸収剤を用いることができる。これらの添加剤の含有量は適宜調整できるが、保護層の全質量に対して0.1~70質量%が好ましく、1~60質量%がさらに好ましい。 As necessary, the protective layer is added with organic fine particles, inorganic fine particles, an absorbent for light of a specific wavelength (for example, ultraviolet rays, near infrared rays, etc.), a refractive index adjusting agent, an antioxidant, an adhesive, a surfactant, and the like. It may contain an agent. Examples of organic fine particles include polymer fine particles (eg, silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), and examples of inorganic fine particles include titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, and aluminum oxide. Examples thereof include titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride, magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate and the like. A known absorber can be used as the absorber of light having a specific wavelength. The content of these additives can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the protective layer.
 また、保護層としては、特開2017-151176号公報の段落番号0073~0092に記載の保護層を用いることもできる。 Further, as the protective layer, the protective layer described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP-A-2017-151176 can also be used.
 カラーフィルタは、下地層を有していてもよい。下地層の表面接触角は、ジヨードメタンで測定した際に20~70°であることが好ましい。また、水で測定した際に30~80°であることが好ましい。下地層の表面接触角が上記範囲であれば、着色組成物の塗れ性が良好である。下地層の表面接触角の調整は、たとえば、界面活性剤の添加などの方法で行うことができる。 The color filter may have a base layer. The surface contact angle of the base layer is preferably 20 to 70 ° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80 ° when measured with water. When the surface contact angle of the base layer is within the above range, the coating property of the coloring composition is good. The surface contact angle of the base layer can be adjusted by, for example, adding a surfactant.
 カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。 The color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition wall, for example, in a grid pattern.
<表示装置>
 本発明の表示装置は、上述した本発明の硬化膜を有する。表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などが挙げられる。表示装置の定義や各表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。
<Display device>
The display device of the present invention has the above-mentioned cured film of the present invention. Examples of the display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence display device. For details on the definition of display devices and the details of each display device, see, for example, "Electronic Display Devices (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd., published in 1990)", "Display Devices (Junaki Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd.)" (Published in 1989) ”and so on. Further, the liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd., published in 1994)". The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "next-generation liquid crystal display technology".
 有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置は、白色有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子からなる光源を有するものであってもよい。白色有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子としては、タンデム構造であることが好ましい。有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子のタンデム構造については、特開2003-045676号公報、三上明義監修、「有機EL技術開発の最前線-高輝度・高精度・長寿命化・ノウハウ集-」、技術情報協会、326-328ページ、2008年などに記載されている。有機EL素子が発光する白色光のスペクトルは、青色領域(430nm-485nm)、緑色領域(530nm-580nm)及び黄色領域(580nm-620nm)に強い極大発光ピークを有するものが好ましい。これらの発光ピークに加えさらに赤色領域(650nm-700nm)に極大発光ピークを有するものがより好ましい。 The organic electroluminescence display device may have a light source composed of a white organic electroluminescence element. The white organic electroluminescence device preferably has a tandem structure. Regarding the tandem structure of organic electroluminescence elements, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-045676, supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, "Frontiers of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection-", Technical Information Association It is described on pages 326-328, 2008 and the like. The spectrum of white light emitted by the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in the blue region (430 nm-485 nm), the green region (530 nm-580 nm), and the yellow region (580 nm-620 nm). In addition to these emission peaks, those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 nm-700 nm) are more preferable.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。 The present invention will be specifically described below with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed as long as they do not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below.
<重量平均分子量(Mw)の測定>
 測定試料の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、以下の条件に従って、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)によって測定した。
 カラムの種類:TOSOH TSKgel Super HZM-Hと、TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ4000と、TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ2000とを連結したカラム
 展開溶媒:テトラヒドロフラン
 カラム温度:40℃
 流量(サンプル注入量):1.0μL(サンプル濃度0.1質量%)
 装置名:東ソー(株)製 HLC-8220GPC
 検出器:RI(屈折率)検出器
 検量線ベース樹脂:ポリスチレン樹脂
<Measurement of weight average molecular weight (Mw)>
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the measurement sample was measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) according to the following conditions.
Column type: TOSOH TSKgel Super HZM-H, TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ4000, and TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ2000 linked. Developing solvent: tetrahydrofuran Column temperature: 40 ° C.
Flow rate (sample injection amount): 1.0 μL (sample concentration 0.1% by mass)
Device name: HLC-8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
Detector: RI (refractive index) detector Calibration curve base resin: Polystyrene resin
<着色剤溶液の調製>
 下記表に記載の原料を均一に撹拌混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーモーターミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した。その後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して着色剤溶液P-R1、P-R2、P-R3、P-R4、P-R5及びP-RC1を調製した。下記表に各原料の配合量を質量部で示している。空欄は含有されないことを表す。
<Preparation of colorant solution>
The raw materials listed in the table below were uniformly stirred and mixed, and then dispersed with an Eiger motor mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan) for 5 hours using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm. Then, the colorant solutions P-R1, P-R2, P-R3, P-R4, P-R5 and P-RC1 were prepared by filtering with a filter having a pore size of 5 μm. The table below shows the blending amount of each raw material by mass. Blank indicates that it is not included.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
 表中の略語で示した原料は以下の通りである。
(赤色着色剤)
 PR177:C.I.Pigment Red 177(赤色顔料)
 PR264:C.I.Pigment Red 264(赤色顔料)
 PR269:C.I.Pigment Red 269(赤色顔料)
 PR254:C.I.Pigment Red 254(赤色顔料)
 PR7:C.I.Pigment Red 7(赤色顔料)
The raw materials indicated by the abbreviations in the table are as follows.
(Red colorant)
PR177: C.I. I. Pigment Red 177 (red pigment)
PR264: C.I. I. Pigment Red 264 (red pigment)
PR269: C.I. I. Pigment Red 269 (red pigment)
PR254: C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 (red pigment)
PR7: C.I. I. Pigment Red 7 (red pigment)
(黄色着色剤)
 PY139:C.I.Pigment Yellow 139(黄色顔料)
(Yellow colorant)
PY139: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139 (yellow pigment)
(分散剤)
 分散剤1:ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール社製)
 分散剤2:以下の方法で調製した樹脂溶液D2
 撹拌機、温度計、滴下装置、還流冷却器、ガス導入管を備えた反応容器にシクロヘキサノン90.0質量部を入れ、容器に窒素ガスを注入しながら60℃に加熱して、同温度でメタクリル酸20.0質量部、メチルメタクリレート10.0質量部、n-ブチルメタクリレート55.0質量部、ベンジルメタクリレート15質量部、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル2.5質量部の混合物を2時間かけて滴下して重合反応を行った。滴下終了後、さらに60℃で1時間反応させた後、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル0.5質量部をプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)10.0質量部に溶解させたものを添加し、その後3時間、同じ温度で撹拌を続けて樹脂(共重合体)を得た。室温に冷却後、シクロヘキサノンで希釈することにより、固形分濃度20%の樹脂溶液D2を得た。得られた樹脂(共重合体)の重量平均分子量は30000であった。
(Dispersant)
Dispersant 1: Solsparse 20000 (manufactured by Japan Lubrizol)
Dispersant 2: Resin solution D2 prepared by the following method
Put 90.0 parts by mass of cyclohexanone in a reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, thermometer, dropping device, reflux cooler, and gas introduction tube, heat to 60 ° C while injecting nitrogen gas into the vessel, and polymerize at the same temperature. A mixture of 20.0 parts by mass of acid, 10.0 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 55.0 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, 15 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate, and 2.5 parts by mass of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile. The polymerization reaction was carried out by dropping over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the mixture was further reacted at 60 ° C. for 1 hour, and then 0.5 parts by mass of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile was dissolved in 10.0 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA). Was added, and then stirring was continued at the same temperature for 3 hours to obtain a resin (copolymer). After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was diluted with cyclohexanone to obtain a resin solution D2 having a solid content concentration of 20%. The weight average molecular weight of the obtained resin (copolymer) was 30,000.
(顔料誘導体)
 顔料誘導体1:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
(Pigment derivative)
Pigment derivative 1: A compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
<着色組成物の調製>
 以下に示す原料を混合し、撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)を用いてろ過して着色組成物を調製した。
<Preparation of coloring composition>
The raw materials shown below were mixed, stirred, and then filtered using a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to prepare a colored composition.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
 表中の略語で示した原料は以下の通りである。
(着色剤溶液)
 P-R1~P-R5、P-Rc1:上記で製造した着色剤溶液P-R1~P-R5、P-Rc1
The raw materials indicated by the abbreviations in the table are as follows.
(Colorant solution)
P-R1 to P-R5, P-Rc1: Colorant solutions P-R1 to P-R5, P-Rc1 produced above.
(光重合開始剤)
 I-1:Irgacure OXE02(BASF社製、下記構造の化合物)
 I-2:Omnirad 2959(IGM Resins B.V.社製、下記構造の化合物)
 I-3:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
(Photopolymerization initiator)
I-1: Irgure OXE02 (manufactured by BASF, a compound having the following structure)
I-2: Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V., compound having the following structure)
I-3: Compound with the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
(樹脂溶液)
 A-1~A-9:下記構造の樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液
 樹脂溶液A-1は、以下の方法で調製した。すなわち、セパラブル4口フラスコに温度計、冷却管、窒素ガス導入管、滴下管および撹拌装置を取り付けた反応容器にPGMEAの207質量部を仕込み、80℃に昇温し、反応容器内を窒素置換した後、滴下管より、スチレン16質量部、メタクリル酸グリシジル75質量部、メタクリル酸ジシクロペンタニル2質量部、メタクリル酸メチル10質量部、及び2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル1.33質量部の混合物を2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、更に3時間反応を継続し、下記構造の樹脂を得た。室温まで冷却した後、PGMEAで希釈して固形分濃度を40質量%に調整し、樹脂溶液A-1を調製した。
 樹脂溶液A-2~A-9は、樹脂溶液A-1と同様の方法にてそれぞれ調製した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
(Resin solution)
A-1 to A-9: 40% by mass PGMEA solution of resin having the following structure Resin solution A-1 was prepared by the following method. That is, 207 parts by mass of PGMEA was placed in a reaction vessel equipped with a thermometer, a cooling tube, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a dropping tube and a stirrer in a separable 4-necked flask, the temperature was raised to 80 ° C., and the inside of the reaction vessel was replaced with nitrogen. Then, from the dropping tube, 16 parts by mass of styrene, 75 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate, 2 parts by mass of dicyclopentanyl methacrylate, 10 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, and 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile 1. 33 parts by weight of the mixture was added dropwise over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the reaction was continued for another 3 hours to obtain a resin having the following structure. After cooling to room temperature, the resin solution A-1 was prepared by diluting with PGMEA to adjust the solid content concentration to 40% by mass.
The resin solutions A-2 to A-9 were prepared in the same manner as the resin solution A-1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 A-10:下記構造の樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
A-10: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 A-11:下記構造の樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
A-111: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 A-12:下記構造の樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
A-12: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 D-1:下記構造の樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
D-1: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 各樹脂の重量平均分子量、環状エーテル基の含有量、酸基の含有量、酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量をそれぞれ下記表に記す。また、樹脂A-1~A-10、A-12、D-1については酸基の含有量に対する環状エーテル基の含有量の割合の値を、含有量比の欄に記載する。また、樹脂A-11については、酸基と酸基が保護基で保護された基の合計含有量に対する環状エーテル基の含有量の割合の値を、含有量比の欄に記載する。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
The weight average molecular weight of each resin, the content of the cyclic ether group, the content of the acid group, and the content of the group whose acid group is protected by the protecting group are shown in the table below. For the resins A-1 to A-10, A-12, and D-1, the value of the ratio of the content of the cyclic ether group to the content of the acid group is described in the column of content ratio. Further, for the resin A-11, the value of the ratio of the content of the cyclic ether group to the total content of the acid group and the group in which the acid group is protected by the protecting group is described in the column of content ratio.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
(重合性化合物)
 M-1:アロニックス M-402(東亞合成(株)製、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレートとジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレートの混合物)
 M-2:下記構造の化合物(a+b+c=3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 M-3:NKエステルA-TMMT(新中村化学工業(株)製)
(Polymerizable compound)
M-1: Aronix M-402 (Made by Toagosei Co., Ltd., a mixture of dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate)
M-2: Compound with the following structure (a + b + c = 3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
M-3: NK Ester A-TMMT (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
(溶剤)
 S-1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 S-2:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
(solvent)
S-1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
S-2: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
<分光の評価>
 スピンコーターを用いて、各着色組成物を乾燥後の膜厚が2μmとなるようにガラス基板上に塗布し、100℃のホットプレート上で2分間乾燥させた。次いで、超高圧水銀ランプを用いて、露光照度20mW/cm、露光量1J/cmの条件で露光した。そして、100℃のホットプレート上で20分間加熱し、放冷して、硬化膜を形成した。硬化膜の作製において、基板の温度は、全工程を通じて20~100℃の範囲である。得られた硬化膜について、紫外可視近赤外分光光度計(UV3600、(株)島津製作所製)を用い、レファレンスをガラス基板として、波長300~800nmの範囲の光の吸光度を測定し、波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax1と波長550~700nmの光に対する吸光度の最小値Amin1との比Amax1/Amin1(以下、吸光度比1という)、波長500nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.3となる波長(以下、波長1という)をそれぞれ測定した。
<Evaluation of spectroscopy>
Using a spin coater, each coloring composition was applied onto a glass substrate so that the film thickness after drying was 2 μm, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, exposure was performed under the conditions of an exposure illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 1 J / cm 2 . Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to form a cured film. In the preparation of the cured film, the temperature of the substrate is in the range of 20 to 100 ° C. throughout the entire process. The obtained cured film was measured for the absorbance of light in the wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm using an ultraviolet-visible near-infrared spectrophotometer (UV3600, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) using a reference as a glass substrate, and the wavelength was 400. The ratio of the maximum absorbance A max1 for light of up to 500 nm and the minimum absorbance A min1 for light with a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm A max1 / A min1 (hereinafter referred to as the absorbance ratio 1), the absorbance for light with a wavelength of 500 nm is 1. Then, the wavelengths at which the absorbance was 0.3 (hereinafter referred to as wavelength 1) were measured.
<混色の評価>
 スピンコーターを用いて、各着色組成物を乾燥後の膜厚が2μmとなるようにガラス基板上に塗布し、100℃のホットプレート上で2分間乾燥させた。次いで、超高圧水銀ランプを用いて、露光照度20mW/cm、露光量100mJ/cmの条件で露光した。次いで、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、更に純水にて水洗した。そして、100℃のホットプレート上で20分間加熱し、放冷して、硬化膜を形成した。MCPD-3000(大塚電子(株)製)を使用して、得られた硬化膜の波長450nmの光の透過率(T1)を測定した。
 次に、この硬化膜上に、混色評価用の着色組成物を乾燥後の膜厚が2μmとなるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、100℃のホットプレート上で2分間乾燥して混色評価用の着色組成物の塗膜を形成し、積層膜を形成した。混色評価用の着色組成物には、後述する実施例1001の青色画素の形成に用いた青色着色組成物を使用した。
 次いで、この積層膜が形成されたガラス基板をスピン・シャワー現像機(DW-30型、(株)ケミトロニクス製)の水平回転テーブル上に載置し、CD-2000(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)の60%希釈液を用いて23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行い、硬化膜上に形成された混色評価用の着色組成物の塗膜を現像除去した。次いで、前述のガラス基板を真空チャック方式で水平回転テーブルに固定し、回転装置によってガラス基板を回転数50rpmで回転させつつ、その回転中心の上方より純水を噴出ノズルからシャワー状に供給してリンス処理を行い、その後スプレー乾燥した。
 MCPD-3000(大塚電子(株)製)を使用して、混色評価用の着色組成物の塗膜を現像除去した後の上記硬化膜の波長450nmの光の透過率(T2)を測定した。
 下記式から透過率の変化率を算出し、下記評価基準に従って混色を評価した。
 透過率の変化率(%)={|透過率(T1)-透過率(T2)|/透過率(T1)}×100
 S:透過率の変化率が0.1%未満である
 A:透過率の変化率が0.1%以上0.25%未満である
 B:透過率の変化率が0.25%以上1%未満である
 C:透過率の変化率が1%以上2.5%未満である
 D:透過率の変化率が2.5%以上5%未満である
 E:透過率の変化率が5%以上である
<Evaluation of color mixing>
Using a spin coater, each coloring composition was applied onto a glass substrate so that the film thickness after drying was 2 μm, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, exposure was performed under the conditions of an exposure illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 . Then, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). Then, it was rinsed with a spin shower and then washed with pure water. Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to form a cured film. Using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.), the transmittance (T1) of the obtained cured film having a wavelength of 450 nm was measured.
Next, a coloring composition for color mixing evaluation is applied onto this cured film using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying is 2 μm, and the mixture is dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes to evaluate the color mixing. A coating film of the coloring composition for use was formed, and a laminated film was formed. As the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation, the blue coloring composition used for forming the blue pixels of Example 1001 described later was used.
Next, the glass substrate on which this laminated film was formed was placed on a horizontal rotary table of a spin shower processor (DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and CD-2000 (Fujifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.) Paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 60% diluted solution (manufactured by Co., Ltd.), and the coating film of the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation formed on the cured film was developed and removed. Next, the above-mentioned glass substrate is fixed to a horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and while the glass substrate is rotated at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device, pure water is supplied from above the center of rotation in a shower shape from above the center of rotation. It was rinsed and then spray dried.
Using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.), the transmittance (T2) of light having a wavelength of 450 nm of the cured film after the coating film of the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation was developed and removed was measured.
The rate of change in transmittance was calculated from the following formula, and the color mixing was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
Change rate of transmittance (%) = {| Transmittance (T1) -Transmittance (T2) | / Transmittance (T1)} x 100
S: The change rate of the transmittance is less than 0.1% A: The change rate of the transmittance is 0.1% or more and less than 0.25% B: The change rate of the transmittance is 0.25% or more and 1% Less than C: Transmittance change rate is 1% or more and less than 2.5% D: Transmittance change rate is 2.5% or more and less than 5% E: Transmittance change rate is 5% or more Is
<保存安定性の評価>
 上記で得られた製造直後の着色組成物の粘度(V)を、東機産業(株)製「RE-85L」にて測定した。この着色組成物を40℃の温度条件のもとで3日間静置した後、粘度(V)を測定した。下記式から増粘率を算出し、下記評価基準に従って保存安定性を評価した。着色組成物の粘度は23℃に温度調整を施した状態で測定した。評価基準は下記の通りとし、評価結果は下記表に記載した。
 増粘率(%)={(粘度(V)-粘度(V))/粘度(V)}×100
 S:増粘率が0.1%未満である
 A:増粘率が0.1%以上0.25%未満である
 B:増粘率が0.25%以上1%未満である
 C:増粘率が1%以上2.5%未満である
 D:増粘率が2.5%以上5%未満である
 E:増粘率が5%以上である
<Evaluation of storage stability>
The viscosity (V 1 ) of the coloring composition immediately after production obtained above was measured with "RE-85L" manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd. The coloring composition was allowed to stand for 3 days under a temperature condition of 40 ° C., and then the viscosity (V 2 ) was measured. The thickening rate was calculated from the following formula, and the storage stability was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The viscosity of the coloring composition was measured in a state where the temperature was adjusted to 23 ° C. The evaluation criteria are as follows, and the evaluation results are shown in the table below.
Thickness increase rate (%) = {(viscosity (V 2 ) -viscosity (V 1 )) / viscosity (V 1 )} × 100
S: The thickening rate is less than 0.1% A: The thickening rate is 0.1% or more and less than 0.25% B: The thickening rate is 0.25% or more and less than 1% C: Increased The viscosity is 1% or more and less than 2.5%. D: The viscosity is 2.5% or more and less than 5%. E: The viscosity is 5% or more.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038
 上記表に示すように、実施例は混色及び保存安定性を高い水準で両立することができた。 As shown in the above table, the examples were able to achieve both color mixing and storage stability at a high level.
 各実施例の着色組成物に、本明細書に記載のフッ素系界面活性剤またはシリコーン系界面活性剤を添加して場合でも同様の効果が得られる。 The same effect can be obtained even when the fluorine-based surfactant or the silicone-based surfactant described in the present specification is added to the coloring composition of each example.
<実施例1001>
 シリコンウエハ上に、緑色着色組成物を製膜後の膜厚が1.0μmになるようにスピンコート法で塗布した。次いで、ホットプレートを用いて、100℃で2分間加熱した。次いで、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(キヤノン(株)製)を用い、12μm四方のドットパターンのマスクを介して1000mJ/cmの露光量で露光した。次いで、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム(TMAH)0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーにてリンスを行い、更に純水にて水洗した。次いで、100℃のホットプレート上で20分間加熱し、放冷して、緑色の着色パターン(緑色画素)を形成した。同様に赤色着色組成物、青色着色組成物を順次パターニングし、赤色の着色パターン(赤色画素)、青色の着色パターン(青色画素)をそれぞれ形成してカラーフィルタを作製した。
 赤色着色組成物としては、実施例1の着色組成物を用いた。緑色着色組成物及び青色着色組成物については後述する。得られたカラーフィルタを公知の方法に従い有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置に組み込んだ。この有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置は好適な画像認識能を有していた。
<Example 1001>
The green coloring composition was applied onto the silicon wafer by a spin coating method so that the film thickness after film formation was 1.0 μm. Then, using a hot plate, it was heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed at an exposure amount of 1000 mJ / cm 2 through a mask with a dot pattern of 12 μm square. Then, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). Then, it was rinsed with a spin shower and then washed with pure water. Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to form a green coloring pattern (green pixel). Similarly, the red coloring composition and the blue coloring composition were sequentially patterned to form a red coloring pattern (red pixel) and a blue coloring pattern (blue pixel), respectively, to produce a color filter.
As the red coloring composition, the coloring composition of Example 1 was used. The green coloring composition and the blue coloring composition will be described later. The obtained color filter was incorporated into an organic electroluminescence display device according to a known method. This organic electroluminescence display device had suitable image recognition ability.
[緑色着色組成物]
 下記成分を混合し、撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)でろ過して、緑色着色組成物を調製した。
 Green顔料分散液  ・・・85質量部
 光重合開始剤(Irgacure OXE02、BASF社製)  ・・・1.04質量部
 光重合開始剤(Omnirad 2959、IGM Resins B.V.社製) 
 ・・・0.77質量部
 樹脂溶液1  ・・・0.9質量部
 フリル基含有化合物溶液1  ・・・1.4質量部
 重合性化合物(下記構造の化合物)  ・・・2.04質量部
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 界面活性剤(下記構造の化合物、Mw=14000、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%の数値はモル%である、フッ素系界面活性剤)・・・0.008質量部
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート  ・・・8.8質量部
[Green coloring composition]
The following components were mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to prepare a green coloring composition.
Green pigment dispersion: 85 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator (Irgacure OXE02, manufactured by BASF) ... 1.04 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator (Omnirad 2959, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
・ ・ ・ 0.77 parts by mass Resin solution 1 ・ ・ ・ 0.9 parts by mass Frill group-containing compound solution 1 ・ ・ ・ 1.4 parts by mass Polymerizable compound (compound with the following structure) ・ ・ ・ 2.04 parts by mass
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Surfactant (compound having the following structure, Mw = 14000, the numerical value of% indicating the ratio of the repeating unit is mol%, fluorine-based surfactant) ... 0.008 parts by mass
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate: 8.8 parts by mass
[青色着色組成物]
 下記成分を混合し、撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)でろ過して、青色着色組成物を調製した。
 Blue顔料分散液  ・・・51.0質量部
 光重合開始剤(Irgacure OXE01、BASF社製)  ・・・2.17質量部
 光重合開始剤(Omnirad 2959、IGM Resins B.V.社製)  ・・・0.83質量部
 樹脂溶液1  ・・・4.1質量部
 フリル基含有化合物溶液1  ・・・6.2質量部
 重合性化合物(下記構造の化合物)  ・・・2.5質量部
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 界面活性剤(KF-6001、信越化学工業社製)  ・・・0.008質量部
 酢酸ブチル  ・・・33.2質量部
[Blue coloring composition]
The following components were mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to prepare a blue coloring composition.
Blue pigment dispersion: 51.0 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator (Irgacure OXE01, manufactured by BASF) ... 2.17 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator (Omnirad 2959, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.).・ ・ 0.83 parts by mass Resin solution 1 ・ ・ ・ 4.1 parts by mass Frill group-containing compound solution 1 ・ ・ ・ 6.2 parts by mass Polymerizable compound (compound with the following structure) ・ ・ ・ 2.5 parts by mass
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Surfactant (KF-6001, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) ・ ・ ・ 0.008 parts by mass Butyl acetate ・ ・ ・ 33.2 parts by mass
 緑色着色組成物および青色着色組成物の調製に使用したGreen顔料分散液、Blue顔料分散液、樹脂溶液1、フリル基含有化合物溶液1は以下の通りである。 The Green pigment dispersion, the Blue pigment dispersion, the resin solution 1, and the frill group-containing compound solution 1 used for preparing the green coloring composition and the blue coloring composition are as follows.
(Green顔料分散液)
 C.I.Pigment Green 36の7.4質量部、C.I.Pigment Yellow 185の5.2質量部、顔料誘導体1の1.4質量部、分散剤1の4.86質量部、PGMEAの81.14質量部からなる混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合および分散して、顔料分散液を調製した。その後さらに、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cmの圧力下で流量500g/minとして分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を10回繰り返し、Green顔料分散液を得た。
(Green pigment dispersion)
C. I. 7.4 parts by mass of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. A mixed solution consisting of 5.2 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 1.4 parts by mass of pigment derivative 1, 4.86 parts by mass of dispersant 1, and 81.14 parts by mass of PGMEA was mixed with a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm). The pigment dispersion was prepared by mixing and dispersing according to the diameter) for 3 hours. After that, a high-pressure disperser with a decompression mechanism NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) was used to perform a dispersion treatment at a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 at a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Green pigment dispersion.
 顔料誘導体1:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 分散剤1:下記構造の樹脂。主鎖の括弧に付した数値は、各繰り返し単位のモル比を表し、側鎖の括弧に付した数値は、繰り返し単位の繰り返し数を表す。重量平均分子量は24000である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Pigment derivative 1: A compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Dispersant 1: A resin having the following structure. The numbers in parentheses in the main chain represent the molar ratio of each repeating unit, and the numbers in parentheses in the side chain represent the number of repetitions in the repeating unit. The weight average molecular weight is 24000.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(Blue顔料分散液)
 C.I.Pigment Blue 15:6の9.5質量部、C.I.Pigment Violet 23の5.0質量部、分散剤1の5.5質量部、PGMEAの80.0質量部からなる混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合および分散して、顔料分散液を調製した。その後さらに、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cmの圧力下で流量500g/minとして分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を10回繰り返し、Blue顔料分散液を得た。
(Blue pigment dispersion)
C. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, 9.5 parts by mass, C.I. I. A mixture consisting of 5.0 parts by mass of Pigment Violet 23, 5.5 parts by mass of dispersant 1, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours using a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.3 mm diameter). , A pigment dispersion was prepared. After that, a high-pressure disperser with a decompression mechanism NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) was used to perform a dispersion treatment at a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 at a flow rate of 500 g / min. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a Blue pigment dispersion liquid.
(樹脂溶液1)
 下記方法で合成した樹脂Aの30質量%PGMEA溶液
 温度計、冷却管、窒素ガス導入管、滴下管および撹拌装置を備えたセパラブル4口フラスコにシクロヘキサノン70.0質量部を仕込み、80℃に昇温し、フラスコ内を窒素置換した後、滴下管より、n-ブチルメタクリレート13.3質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート4.6質量部、メタクリル酸4.3質量部、パラクミルフェノールエチレンオキサイド変性アクリレート(東亞合成(株)製、アロニックスM110)7.4質量部および2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル0.4質量部の混合物を2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、さらに3時間反応を継続して樹脂A(Mw=26000)を合成し、PGMEAで希釈することにより、樹脂Aの30質量%PGMEA溶液を得た。
(Resin solution 1)
30% by mass PGMEA solution of resin A synthesized by the following method Put 70.0 parts by mass of cyclohexanone in a separable 4-necked flask equipped with a thermometer, a cooling tube, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a dropping tube and a stirrer, and raise the temperature to 80 ° C. After warming and replacing the inside of the flask with nitrogen, 13.3 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, 4.6 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 4.3 parts by mass of methacrylic acid, and paracumylphenol ethylene oxide modification from the dropping tube. A mixture of 7.4 parts by mass of acrylate (Aronix M110 manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.) and 0.4 parts by mass of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile was added dropwise over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the reaction was continued for another 3 hours to synthesize resin A (Mw = 26000) and diluted with PGMEA to obtain a 30% by mass PGMEA solution of resin A.
(フリル基含有化合物溶液1)
 下記方法で合成したフリル基含有化合物F1の20質量%PGMEA溶液
 撹拌機、温度計、滴下装置、還流冷却器、ガス導入管を備えた反応容器にPGMEA90.0質量部を入れ、容器に窒素ガスを注入しながら60℃に加熱して、同温度でフルフリルメタクリレート50.0質量部、2-メタクリロイルオキシエチルコハク酸26.7質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート23.3質量部、2,2’-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)2.5質量部の混合物を2時間かけて滴下して重合反応を行った。滴下終了後、さらに60℃で1時間反応させた後、2,2’-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)0.5質量部をPGMEA10.0質量部に溶解させたものを添加し、その後3時間、同じ温度で撹拌を続け共重合体を得た。室温に冷却後、PGMEAで希釈することにより、フリル基含有化合物F1(Mw=52000)の20質量%PGMEA溶液を得た。
(Frill group-containing compound solution 1)
20% by mass PGMEA solution of frill group-containing compound F1 synthesized by the following method Put 90.0 parts by mass of PGMEA in a reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, thermometer, dropping device, reflux condenser, and gas introduction tube, and nitrogen gas in the container. Heat to 60 ° C. while injecting, and at the same temperature, 50.0 parts by mass of flufuryl methacrylate, 26.7 parts by mass of 2-methacryloyloxyethyl succinic acid, 23.3 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2,2. A mixture of 2.5 parts by mass of'-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) was added dropwise over 2 hours to carry out a polymerization reaction. After completion of the dropping, the mixture was further reacted at 60 ° C. for 1 hour, and then 0.5 part by mass of 2,2'-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) dissolved in 10.0 parts by mass of PGMEA was added. After that, stirring was continued at the same temperature for 3 hours to obtain a copolymer. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was diluted with PGMEA to obtain a 20% by mass PGMEA solution of the frill group-containing compound F1 (Mw = 52000).

Claims (13)

  1.  赤色着色剤を含む着色剤と、樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤とを含む着色組成物であって、
     前記樹脂は、式(e-1)で表される基および式(e-2)で表される基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの環状エーテル基Aを有する繰り返し単位Aと、
     酸基を有する繰り返し単位B-1および酸基が保護基で保護された基を有する繰り返し単位B-2から選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位Bと、を含む樹脂EPを含み、
     前記着色組成物は、波長400~500nmの光に対する吸光度の最大値Amax1と波長550~700nmの光に対する吸光度の最小値Amin1との比Amax1/Amin1が25以上であり、
     波長500nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.3となる波長が570~620nmの範囲に存在する、着色組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     式(e-1)中、RE1は水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、nは0または1を表し、*は結合手を表す;
     式(e-2)中、環AE1は単環の脂肪族炭化水素環を表し、*は結合手を表す。
    A coloring composition containing a colorant containing a red colorant, a resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
    The resin comprises a repeating unit A having at least one cyclic ether group A selected from a group represented by the formula (e-1) and a group represented by the formula (e-2).
    It comprises a resin EP comprising at least one repeating unit B selected from a repeating unit B-1 having an acid group and a repeating unit B-2 having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group.
    The coloring composition has a ratio of A max1 / A min1 of the maximum value A max1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and the minimum value A min1 of the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm of 25 or more.
    A coloring composition in which a wavelength having an absorbance of 0.3 exists in the range of 570 to 620 nm when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 500 nm is 1.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In formula (e-1), RE1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond;
    In formula (e-2), ring A E1 represents a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and * represents a bond.
  2.  前記樹脂EPは、前記環状エーテル基Aの含有量が2.0~6.5mmol/gであり、前記酸基の含有量と前記酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量との合計が0.45~2.35mmol/gである、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The resin EP has the content of the cyclic ether group A of 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g, and is the sum of the content of the acid group and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group. The coloring composition according to claim 1, wherein the amount is 0.45 to 2.35 mmol / g.
  3.  前記樹脂EPの前記環状エーテル基Aの含有量と、前記酸基の含有量と、前記酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量とが下記式(1)の条件を満たす、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物。
     1.0≦(樹脂EPの前記環状エーテル基Aの含有量(単位:mmol/g)/(樹脂EPの前記酸基の含有量(単位:mmol/g)+(樹脂EPの前記酸基が保護基で保護された基の含有量(単位:mmol/g))≦14.0    ・・・(1)
    The claim that the content of the cyclic ether group A of the resin EP, the content of the acid group, and the content of the group in which the acid group is protected by a protecting group satisfy the condition of the following formula (1). The coloring composition according to 1 or 2.
    1.0 ≦ (Content of the cyclic ether group A of the resin EP (unit: mmol / g) / (Content of the acid group of the resin EP (unit: mmol / g) + (The acid group of the resin EP is Content of groups protected by protecting groups (unit: mmol / g)) ≤14.0 ... (1)
  4.  前記酸基がフェノール性ヒドロキシ基、または、カルボキシ基である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the acid group is a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group.
  5.  前記保護基は、式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基である、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
     式(Y1):-C(RY1)(RY2)(RY3
     式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(RY4)(RY5)(RY6
     式(Y3):-C(RY7)(RY8)(ORY9
     式(Y4):-C(RY10)(H)(ArY1
     式(Y5):-C(=O)(RY11
     式(Y1)中、RY1~RY3は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY1~RY3のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
     式(Y2)中、RY4~RY6は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY4~RY6のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
     式(Y3)中、RY7およびRY8は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7およびRY8の少なくとも一方がアルキル基またはアリール基であり、RY9は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
     式(Y4)中、ArY1は、アリール基を表し、RY10は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す;
     式(Y5)中、RY11は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
    The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the protecting group is a group represented by any of the formulas (Y1) to (Y5);
    Equation ( Y1 ): -C (RY1) ( RY2 ) ( RY3 )
    Equation (Y2): -C (= O) OC ( RY4 ) ( RY5 ) ( RY6 )
    Equation (Y3): -C ( RY7 ) ( RY8 ) (OR Y9 )
    Equation (Y4): -C ( RY10 ) (H) (Ar Y1 )
    Equation (Y5): -C (= O) ( RY11 )
    In formula ( Y1 ), RY1 to RY3 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY1 to RY3 may be bonded to form a ring;
    In formula (Y2), RY4 to RY6 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY4 to RY6 may be bonded to form a ring;
    In formula (Y3), RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl. Representing a group or aryl group, RY7 or RY8 and RY9 may be combined to form a ring;
    In formula (Y4), Ar Y1 represents an aryl group and RY10 represents an alkyl or aryl group;
    In formula (Y5), RY11 represents an alkyl or aryl group.
  6.  前記着色剤は、更に黄色着色剤を含む、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the coloring agent further contains a yellow coloring agent.
  7.  前記着色剤中の前記赤色着色剤の含有量が70質量%以上である、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the content of the red colorant in the colorant is 70% by mass or more.
  8.  全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で硬化膜を形成するために用いられる、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process.
  9.  カラーフィルタ用である、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8, which is for a color filter.
  10.  表示装置用である、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, which is for a display device.
  11.  請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を硬化して得られる硬化膜。 A cured film obtained by curing the coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  12.  請求項11に記載の硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ。 The color filter having the cured film according to claim 11.
  13.  請求項11に記載の硬化膜を有する表示装置。 A display device having the cured film according to claim 11.
PCT/JP2021/030474 2020-08-31 2021-08-19 Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, and display device WO2022044972A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022544527A JPWO2022044972A1 (en) 2020-08-31 2021-08-19
CN202180048015.3A CN115803682A (en) 2020-08-31 2021-08-19 Coloring composition, hardening film, color filter and display device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020145362 2020-08-31
JP2020-145362 2020-08-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022044972A1 true WO2022044972A1 (en) 2022-03-03

Family

ID=80355139

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/030474 WO2022044972A1 (en) 2020-08-31 2021-08-19 Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, and display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022044972A1 (en)
CN (1) CN115803682A (en)
TW (1) TW202210527A (en)
WO (1) WO2022044972A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH09325209A (en) * 1996-06-06 1997-12-16 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Color filter for lcd display device
JPH1114824A (en) * 1997-04-28 1999-01-22 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Red composition for color filter and color filter
JP2007292840A (en) * 2006-04-21 2007-11-08 Jsr Corp Radiation-sensitive composition for colored layer formation, color filter and color liquid crystal display element
WO2019142415A1 (en) * 2018-01-19 2019-07-25 昭和電工株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition for color filter, color filter, image display element and method for manufacturing color filter
KR20190108235A (en) * 2018-03-14 2019-09-24 동우 화인켐 주식회사 A red colored photosensitive resin composition, color filter and image display device produced using the same
JP2020060645A (en) * 2018-10-09 2020-04-16 山陽色素株式会社 Coloring composition for color filter containing dark sub dye

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH09325209A (en) * 1996-06-06 1997-12-16 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Color filter for lcd display device
JPH1114824A (en) * 1997-04-28 1999-01-22 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Red composition for color filter and color filter
JP2007292840A (en) * 2006-04-21 2007-11-08 Jsr Corp Radiation-sensitive composition for colored layer formation, color filter and color liquid crystal display element
WO2019142415A1 (en) * 2018-01-19 2019-07-25 昭和電工株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition for color filter, color filter, image display element and method for manufacturing color filter
KR20190108235A (en) * 2018-03-14 2019-09-24 동우 화인켐 주식회사 A red colored photosensitive resin composition, color filter and image display device produced using the same
JP2020060645A (en) * 2018-10-09 2020-04-16 山陽色素株式会社 Coloring composition for color filter containing dark sub dye

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115803682A (en) 2023-03-14
JPWO2022044972A1 (en) 2022-03-03
TW202210527A (en) 2022-03-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2024009929A (en) Colored photosensitive composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device
JP7080325B2 (en) Curable composition, film, color filter, manufacturing method of color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device
JP7376617B2 (en) Color filter, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state image sensor and display device
JP7220776B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, structure, color filter and display device
WO2022168741A1 (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2022113756A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured product, color filter, solid state imaging element, image display device, and compound
JP7169362B2 (en) Coloring composition, method for forming cured film, method for producing color filter, and method for producing display device
WO2022168742A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
JP7198819B2 (en) Curable composition, method for producing curable composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7095091B2 (en) Photosensitive composition, film, color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device
WO2022024554A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and resin and method for producing same
JP7301989B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter and display device
WO2022044972A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, and display device
JP7376609B2 (en) Colored compositions, cured films, structures, color filters and display devices
JP7290731B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7302014B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device
JP7273046B2 (en) Coloring composition, method for forming pixel, method for producing color filter, and method for producing display device
WO2022064904A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, structure body, color filter, and display device
WO2022196401A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, and display device
JP2022119701A (en) Photosensitive composition, method for producing photosensitive composition, film, optical filter, solid state image sensor and image display device
WO2023100585A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, display device, and structural body
WO2022080046A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, optical sensor, and display device
WO2022004683A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2023157740A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2022181158A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter and solid-state imaging device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21861400

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022544527

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21861400

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1